JP2020014793A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine for improving a performance effect.SOLUTION: When a super-ready-to-win A results, a character 31AK001 as a friend character is displayed on an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win performance is started. When a predetermined period passes after a ready-to-win performance is started, namely for example when an introduction part of the ready-to-win performance is completed, a title 31AK002 of the super-ready-to-win A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, and the title of the super-ready-to-win A is reported when a sound corresponding to the title name of a ready-to-win is outputted from a speaker 8. Also, a game machine includes specific display execution means capable of starting display according to start of variable display, and executing specific display for completing display according to completion of variable display. The specific display execution means can display specific display by a mode capable of suggesting a variable display period, and can change the mode of the specific display according to a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state when specific display is being displayed by a mode capable of suggesting the variable display period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title that notifies the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-101428

  In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect of production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
further,
Specific display execution that starts display in response to the start of variable display and ends display in response to the end of variable display (for example, active display or display of sphere display 129IW002b in active display movement effect) With means,
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that indicates that the control is performed in the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of the above (4),
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17E and 18I).
During the valid period of the detection by the detecting means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display of the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Display means (for example, an image having the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d)) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size. Further comprising a display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120).
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and (d)) Can be displayed (for example, fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the following inventions (9) to (14). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in some gaming machines, transition of the contents of effects has been shown in a flowchart as shown in JP-A-2003-93653. In the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the contents of the effect are displayed in advance, the player may be dissatisfied with the understanding of the development, and the interest may be reduced. Therefore, it is desired to enhance the effect of the effect. In view of this, there has been a demand for providing a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of production.

(9) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect includes:
A gaming machine that performs a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Specific display execution that starts display in response to the start of variable display and ends display in response to the end of variable display (for example, active display or display of sphere display 129IW002b in active display movement effect) With means,
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(10) In the gaming machine of (9), the specific display execution means displays the specific display in a predetermined display area (for example, an information display area 129IW001; see FIG. 22-4) in which information relating to the variable display is displayed. It may be.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the variable display period.

(11) In the gaming machine according to (10), when the specific display is displayed, the information on the variable display in the predetermined display area becomes difficult to see (see FIGS. 22-3 and 22-4). Is also good.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the variable display being executed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (9) to (11), the specific display execution means moves and displays the specific display during the variable display, and suggests the variable display period based on the display position of the specific display. When the specific display is moved, the mode of the specific display may be changed (see FIG. 22-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously attract the player's attention to the moving specific display.

(13) In any of the gaming machines according to (9) to (12), even if the specific display mode after the change is the same, at which display position is the specific display changed? (See FIG. 22-2 (D)).
According to such a configuration, a position at which the specific display changes can be noticed.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (9) to (13), when the specific display moves, the specific display may be displayed in a different mode from before moving the locus area. .
According to such a configuration, the elapsed period can be easily recognized.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. FIG. 9 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine according to another characteristic portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value used as the random number for games which concerns on another characteristic part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a variation pattern according to another characteristic portion. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit type which concerns on another characteristic part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the data holding area for game control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing arrangement and display contents of a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the storage area which memorizes the number of prize balls concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a memory map concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the built-in RAM area concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing an example of control of a display in a display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of execution of buffer update according to another characteristic part. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process according to another characteristic unit. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the display mode of the display monitor concerning other characteristic parts. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a modification example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear perspective view showing a pachinko gaming machine in a modified example according to another characteristic portion. It is a rear surface perspective view showing the state where the frame for gaming machines in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part was opened. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing a security cover in a modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing an example of state control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning other characteristic parts. It is a figure showing the priority of effect control concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing in the modification concerning other characteristic parts. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation process in progress in the modification which concerns on another characteristic part. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the output amount change switch concerning characteristic part 71AK. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating initial setting control related to a characteristic unit 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of execution of information concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the output switching process at the start which concerns on the characteristic part 71AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of an in-progress output change processing concerning feature part 71AK. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect control in the modification concerning the characteristic part 71AK. It is a figure showing an example of execution of an initial operation concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure showing a control pattern concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning feature part 72AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of a power supply in the modification concerning the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the setting confirmation information screen concerning feature part 73AK. It is a figure showing the example of composition of the production control pattern concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control main processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of confirmation effect control processing concerning feature part 74AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 74AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the confirmation effect control process during a setting change concerning the characteristic part 75AK. It is a timing chart etc. which show the example of control of the confirmation effect concerning characteristic part 75AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the production control process processing concerning characteristic part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the setting suggestion effect start process which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK, and the kind of timer which concerns on the characteristic part 100AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the type of the setting suggestion effect concerning the characteristic part 100AK, the type of the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion effect execution processing concerning feature part 100AK. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation concerning characteristic part 100AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of active display production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an active display change effect execution determination table, an active display movement effect execution determination table, an active display mode determination table, and an active display change timing determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a production mode of an active display change production. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect form of an active display movement effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect form of an active display movement effect and an active display change effect. It is a flow chart which shows an example of predetermined production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a predetermined effect execution determination table and a decoration display determination table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an information display area. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of a predetermined production | presentation (hold change). It is an explanatory view showing an example of a production mode of a predetermined production (background change).

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. Type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game state ends, odd decorative symbols (for example, "7") are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the non-probable design has reached the reach mode, a promotion effect that eventually becomes a “probable change” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, the effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal and a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 counts, in an updatable manner, numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the initialization process (Step S8) is executed because the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-day drawing” is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as a part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of stored memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of stored memories, and a pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.).

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on the display result being “big hit”. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the jackpot ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like for performing a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt inhibition. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt inhibit state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interruption permission, and then ends the command reception interruption processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that it is possible to confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command in the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with a rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Subsequent to the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the processing of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Or to drive the movable body 32, to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to output a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. However, the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form distributed by installing it in a storage device included in it. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a view for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach-loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is "losing". And the display result is "big hit", such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the display mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the super-reach reach performance, an advanced performance that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves into a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by the effect devices with the reach of the higher reliability than the reach of the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively fueled, and the effect of the performance is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” is stopped and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super-reach effect, such as the end of the super-reach-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the Super Reach B title. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect or the like is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory portion until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9H. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title name as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size, for example, in the upper right portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with a high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation suggestion indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expected degree suggestion display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is “losing”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 10D. A fixed decoration symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the determined effect, and it is possible to execute a sharp title notification.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and the variable display is executed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the item may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of evolving to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, and may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sandstorm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 moves. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves to display the expectation indicator 31AK024. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black diamond is highlighted, as shown in FIG. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree suggestion production). May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the degree of expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays indicating the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed, and The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the title of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, after the title display mode has changed, sound according to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are also items that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing at which the display color of the title changes, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color change, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, in the normal mode, the display color of the title is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, and in the special mode, the normal mode and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to a character display mode (for example, a display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute the speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach effect are changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the performance effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big hit reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation mode of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing in this way, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect in which the reliability of the big hit is foreseen by a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be different depending on, for example, the type of super reach. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of the effect on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( (FIG. 10 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17 (A), after the image display device 5 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (B), a character 31AK041 as an ally character and a character 31AK042 as an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modified example, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18H, a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18I, an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18J, and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18K. Is displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is performed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. In addition, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to a difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the player by emitting the game effect lamp 9. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Also, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters “Battle Reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is generated in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as “hot hot”. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable display screen with the numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, a fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Description of configuration related to other characteristic parts)
Next, another feature of the embodiment of the present invention will be described. This feature allows a control of an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player based on the set value, and a configuration or a setting for enabling the set value to be changed based on a predetermined setting change operation. There is provided a configuration for enabling the user to confirm the set value by display. Then, a set value can be displayed by a configuration capable of displaying information on a game value such as a prize ball given based on a game medium such as a game ball entering a predetermined area.

  FIG. 20A is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion. The same components as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. For example, the output circuit 111 may have a configuration similar to that of the solenoid circuit 111. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B only need to have the same configuration as the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. The effect display device 5 only needs to have a configuration similar to that of the image display device 5. The case where the display result is “outside” (hiragana) is the same as the case where the display result is “losing” (katakana). The first general winning opening switch 26A, the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D are game balls that have passed (entered) any one of the plurality of general winning openings 10. Is detected, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection.

  The effect control board 12 is connected to operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member serving as a movable role (movable effect device), and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. . The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or motors using an electromagnetic solenoid. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured using a contact-type sensor such as a microswitch or a non-contact-type sensor such as a photosensor or a capacitance sensor. The effect control board 12 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC) 126 capable of outputting time information.

  In this embodiment, when controlled to the small hitting game state, a second special winning opening provided separately from the first special winning opening, which is a special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, An open state is established in a predetermined open mode. For example, in the small hitting game state, the second large winning opening is opened in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. State. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is set to be opened once until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses in the small hitting game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be opened a plurality of times in the small hitting game state. The second special winning opening is opened by the second special winning opening door when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is on, and the game ball passes (enters) the second special winning opening. It will be easier. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 for the second special winning opening door is in the off state, the second special winning opening is closed by the second special winning opening door, and the game ball passes through the second special winning opening ( Entry). As described above, the second large winning opening changes between an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, in place of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state where the game ball is hard to pass (enter) the second big winning port is provided. You may.

  The count switch 23 is a first count switch that detects a game ball that has passed (entered) the first big winning opening. Game balls passing through (entering) the second special winning opening pass through a second count switch installed in the second special winning opening, and are detected by the second count switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through (enters) the second large winning opening that has been opened, the game ball passes (enters) another normal winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. ), More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, when the second special winning opening is in the open state, the game balls can enter the second special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) a game ball to the second special winning opening to obtain a prize ball, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A third count switch and a fourth count switch through which a game ball can pass are provided inside the second big winning opening. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second winning port passes through either the third count switch or the fourth count switch, and is guided to the back side of the game board 2. The game ball passes through the third count switch and is detected by the third count switch. The game ball is detected by the fourth count switch by passing through the fourth count switch.

  In the present embodiment, the game state after the end of the small hit game is controlled to the big hit game state based on the detection of the game ball by the third count switch during the small hit game. Therefore, if the course of the game ball is changed by adding vibration or the like and the third count switch detects the game ball during the period in which the second big winning opening door is opened during the small hit game, Since it becomes possible for the player to be controlled to be in a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment stops the game in such a case.

  A regulating member that regulates and allows the flow of the game ball toward the third count switch is provided inside the second winning hole. The restricting member is provided so as to be changeable between a restricting state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is restricted and an allowable state in which the flowing of the game ball toward the third count switch is permitted. Have been.

  In the small hitting game state, when a game ball that has won the second big winning port passes through the third count switch, a "big hit" based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch (V winning big hit). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the big hit game state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the third count switch. On the other hand, if the game ball that has won the second big winning opening in the small hitting game state passes through the fourth count switch, the "big hit" does not occur. That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the big hit gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the fourth count switch.

  Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch, the second big winning opening door is set to a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number ( During the period until 10 (for example, 10) winning balls are generated, the second winning port is opened. As a result, a round game in which the second large winning opening is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed. In the present embodiment, the second big winning opening is controlled to the first state when the state is controlled to the big hit game state based on the passage of the third count switch. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited thereto, and the first special winning opening may be controlled to the first state.

  The round game, which is the opening cycle of the second special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or “5”). Even before the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the round game may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the second big winning opening). Good.

  FIG. 20B is a rear view illustrating the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the power supply board 17, and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 201. The main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 29 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of displaying various kinds of winning information related to winning on the display monitor 29. A display switch 30 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 29, and the information displayed on the display monitor 29 can be switched by operating the display switch 30.

  The main board 11 has a door opening sensor 90 for detecting the opening of a glass door frame which covers the front surface of the game board 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a large winning opening for detecting the opening of the first and second big prize holes. Various sensors such as a door sensor 91 are connected, and a function of determining occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on detection signals output from these sensors is also provided. A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The main substrate 11 is sealed in a substrate case 201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material. A display monitor 29 (for example, 7 segments) is disposed in the center of the main substrate 11, and a right side of the display monitor 29 is provided. A display changeover switch 30 is provided. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged at the front when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when the main board 11 is visually recognized refers to a back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (a first winning opening, a second winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”). ) Is counted, and various kinds of winning information, such as the ratio and the winning ratio, are displayed on the display monitor 29 based on the counting, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. On the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed (verified) whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, whether or not the adjustment has been performed, what kind of adjustment has been performed, and as a result of the adjustment, the gaming ball enters the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Is checked (verified). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize the presence or absence of the adjustment after installation and the contents.

  The power supply board 17 is configured to be able to supply power from an AC power supply (AC 100 V), which is an external power supply (commercial power supply), to electric components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. ing. The power supply board 17 is sealed in a board case 202 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a lock switch 51 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface of the power supply board 17. In the change state, there is provided a setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate). The power supply board 17 is provided with a clear switch AK001 and a power switch AK002.

  The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the staff in possession can operate. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires key operation, only the staff having the key for operating the lock switch 51 can be operated among the staff at the game arcade. The lock switch 51 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key, and is also a switch that can execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation).

  When a power-on operation using the power switch AK002 is performed, a predetermined operation using the lock switch 51 or the clear switch AK001, such as an on / off switching operation of the lock switch 51 and a pressing operation of the clear switch AK001, is performed. May be asked. The lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 may perform a predetermined operation using these switches simultaneously with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Therefore, at least the lock switch 51, the clear switch AK001, and the power switch AK002 only need to be arranged at positions where they can be operated simultaneously by a staff at a game arcade or the like. As described above, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 can detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by game room attendants or the like in accordance with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002. Is configured.

  At the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is provided a nozzle (discharge port) for discharging a gaming ball that has won a winning port or a gaming ball that has entered the out port to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided with an outlet switch 70 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball). The signal from the outlet switch 70 is taken into the switch circuit 110 of the main board 11.

  FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration. The first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". This command form is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  The command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left,” “middle,” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command for specifying a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result notification command, when the variable display result is a "losing", "big hit", or "small hit" determination result (predetermined result) or when the variable display result is "big hit" Different EXT data is set according to the result of determining which of the large hit types is one of the multiple types (big hit type determination result).

  The variable display result notification command includes, for example, commands 8C00H to 8C05H. The command 8C00H is a first variable display result designating command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit A”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit B”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the effect display device 5. The command 9000H is a RAM clear notification command for notifying that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been cleared with the initialization of the game control microcomputer 100 when the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is. The command 9100H is a setting change start command for designating the start of a setting change state in which a set value can be changed when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9200H is a power outage restoration designation command for designating execution of a power outage restoration process corresponding to power outage restoration. The command 93XXH is a setting change end command for designating the end of the setting change state.

  In the setting change end command, for example, EXT data corresponding to a setting value newly set by the change may be set. In this case, different EXT data is set according to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change state or the set value continuously set without being changed. When the setting value has three stages of 1 to 3, the command 9300H specifies that the setting value is set to “1”, and the command 9301H specifies that the setting value is set to “2”. However, the command 9302H may specify that the setting value is set to “3”. Alternatively, as the setting change end command, only the command 9300H whose EXT data is 00H is prepared, and the end of the setting change state may be designated by the command 9300H regardless of the setting value newly set by the change. Alternatively, as an effect control command different from the setting change end command, a setting value designation command for designating a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided. In addition to the case where the setting value designation command is transmitted along with the transmission of the setting change end command, for example, with the transmission of the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command, the setting value designation command corresponds to the start of fluctuation in each time of the special figure game. May be transmitted. Also, for example, a set value designation command may be transmitted as the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display is executed, such as every ten times of the fluctuation start in the special figure game. Alternatively or additionally, the set value designation command may be transmitted with the transmission of the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command. The setting value designation command may be transmitted along with the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command.

  The command 9400H is a setting check start command for designating the start of a setting check state in which a set value can be checked when power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command 9401H is a setting confirmation end command for designating the end of the setting confirmation state. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , A time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the generated error (abnormal). In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to be generated on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process. The command 9F00H is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating the display of a customer waiting demonstration screen (demo screen display) by displaying an effect image corresponding to the stoppage of the game in the customer waiting state.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command for designating a period in which the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a command after the opening of the special winning opening that specifies a period in which the special winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening of the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. The command B200H indicates that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition is satisfied. Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for reporting the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage count notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage count may be used.

  The command D100H is a V prize notification designation command for notifying that the third count switch has been turned on when the game ball has passed the third count switch, that is, that a V prize has been won. In the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a control for executing a V-prize notification effect for notifying that a V-prize has been won based on the reception of the V-prize notification designation command. In the V-prize information presentation effect, a different effect pattern may be determined or the determination ratio of a plurality of effect patterns may be made different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the set value may be suggested according to the presentation mode of the V winning information presentation effect. For example, when the effect image indicating "V" is rotated and displayed, the effect mode of the V winning information effect includes an effect mode in which the rotation direction is clockwise and an effect mode in which the rotation direction is counterclockwise. It may be. Alternatively, a plurality of effect modes in which the effect image indicating “V” has different display colors may be included. Then, along with the transmission of the V winning notification designation command, the set value designation command may be transmitted. Thus, when the V-prize notification effect is performed, the effect mode according to the set value can be appropriately determined.

  FIG. 20D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value serving as a game random number counted on the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR3 for determining the general figure display result. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 5, the present invention is not limited to this. May be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss is also referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern of the reach loss is also referred to as a reach fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern in which the display result is “big hit” is also referred to as a large hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” is also referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach, such as normal reach α, normal reach β,. A variation pattern may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  In the ROM 101, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1), a display result determination table (set value 2), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), a big hit type determination A table (for the second special symbol), a small hit type determination table, and the like are stored.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit is changed. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of the display result determination table. In the display result determination table, a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the display result determination table, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second) and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). For each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a large hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

  FIG. 20-6 (A) shows a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, that is, if the first special symbol is to be subjected to the variable display, the set value is “ It is determined that a big hit is won with a higher probability (1/99) than the case of “2” and “3”, and that a part of these judgment values is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small hit. The small hit is won with a higher probability (1/50) than when the value is “2” or “3”. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and even when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/99) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (100/200) is higher than when the first special symbol is a target of variable display. ) To win a small hit.

  FIG. 20B illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the jackpot is hit with a lower probability (1/150) than when the setting value is “1”. At the same time as winning, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, so that the small hits have a lower probability (1/99) than when the set value is “1”. You are going to win. When the display variable determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variable special figure specification buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure specification buffer is the first. Is determined, and when the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the big hit is obtained with the same probability (1/150) as when the first special symbol is the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , A small hit is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1”.

  FIG. 20C illustrates a display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3. When using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is set, but the determination value corresponding to the small hit is When the first special symbol is set as a variable display target, the jackpot has a lower probability (1/200) than the case where the set value is “1” or “2”. Wins, but does not win small hits (win probability: 0). When using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit is the same as the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first. Is set, and even when the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, the big hit with the same probability (1/200) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. And half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and , The small value is won with the same probability (100/200) as when the set value is “1” or “2”.

  The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the special symbol has a big hit (big hit A to big hit). Jackpot C). If MR1 matches any one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit and a probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is a big hit symbol It is also to decide whether or not to do. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol. As described above, since the probability of being controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state is different depending on the set value, if the set value is changed, one setting is set in a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for the player. Will be changed to another setting.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the display result determination tables, the winning probability of small hits when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second is assumed to be the same, but the small hits are set in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. The winning probability may be reduced. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first, the winning probability of the small hit is made lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3, but the same as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second. Alternatively, the same winning probability may be used for all set values.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit. However, the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table are provided separately, and the big hit is determined. The determination is made using a common table in the case of the variation display of the first special symbol and the case of the variation display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The processing may be performed using separate tables for the case where the variable special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the buffer is the second.

  In the present embodiment, when the display variable determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is determined as the determination value corresponding to the small hit. It was not set, that is, the small hit was not won, but a part of the judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to the big hit was set as the judgment value corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit was won. It may be. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be set to two or four or more (for example, six). Further, the advantage of the player according to the set value is not limited to the advantage that the smaller the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player, and the larger the set value is, the higher the advantage is for the player. Is also good. For example, in the case where the set value is made up of six stages from 1 to 6, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and 6 The highest payout rate may be used. As described above, when the set value is set to 1, the advantage is lowest for the player, and when 6 is set, the advantage is highest for the player. The advantage may be gradually increased.

  FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table and the small hit type determination table. The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determining random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. The small hit type determination table indicates that the type of the small hit is the small hit A or the small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for the hit type determination when the variation display result is determined to be the small hit symbol. Is referred to to determine. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit A, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit D is executed. Has become. When the game ball passes through the third count switch during the small hit game of the small hit B, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit game of the big hit type of the big hit E is executed. . The big hit D and the big hit E are not the big hit type determined by the random number value MR2 for hit type determination extracted at the time of the start winning, and the game ball is not played during the small hit game of the small hit A or the small hit B. This is a type of jackpot determined by whether or not a three-count switch has been passed.

  FIG. 20-7 (A) shows a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol is changed and displayed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 20-7 (B) shows a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol). The big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) uses the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed) to determine the big hit type. Referenced when making a decision.

  FIG. 20C illustrates a small hit type determination table. The small hit type determination table is referred to when the small hit type is determined regardless of which of the first winning winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball is in the hold memory based on winning. .

  FIG. 20-8 is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the big hit types are big hit A and big hit D in which the time saving control is not executed after the big hit gaming state ends, and big hit B, big hit C and big hit E in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends. Is set. Of these jackpots A to E, jackpot C and jackpot E are regarded as the most advantageous jackpots for the player, and jackpot A and jackpot D are regarded as the most disadvantageous jackpots for the player. Also, the big hit E is a big hit that is more advantageous than the big hit D, so that the small hit B is a smaller hit that is more advantageous than the small hit A.

  Among these jackpots A to E, the jackpot A is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the first big winning opening into the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hitting game state of the big hit A, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit B is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit B is completed, the time-saving control is executed until the big hit occurs again until the 20 special figure games are executed or the 20 special figure games are executed. The big hit C is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the first big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the big hit game state of the big hit C is completed, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed. The big hit D is a big hit that is repeatedly executed four times (so-called four rounds) to change the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit D, the time-saving control is not executed. The big hit E is a big hit that is repeatedly executed 14 times (so-called 14 rounds) for changing the second big winning opening to the second state advantageous to the player. Further, after the big hit game state of the big hit E ends, the time-saving control is executed until a big hit occurs again until 100 special figure games are executed or 100 special figure games are executed.

  The jackpot D and the jackpot E have the second jackpot as the opening jackpot to be opened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , The first big winning opening. That is, the second big winning opening is opened for the small hit game, and the big hit D and the big hit E based on the occurrence of the V winning during the small hit game are replaced with the first big winning opening as the big hit game. You only have to open the big winning opening.

  In the time-saving state, the probability of being "hit the ordinary figure" is increased, so that a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. For this reason, in the time saving state, a big hit may occur as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and a big hit may occur when the game ball wins V during the small hit game. It is likely to occur continuously without going through the state, and it becomes a so-called continuous state.

  In the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit B, the number of special figure games for which the time saving control is executed is set to 20, so that a small hit occurs during the 20 special figure games and the game ball The rate of passing through the 3-count switch (the rate at which a gaming ball wins a V during 20 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to about 50%. On the other hand, in the time saving state after the big hit game of the big hit C and the big hit E, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed is set to 100, so that a small hit occurs during the 100 special figure games. The rate at which game balls pass through the third count switch (the rate at which a game ball wins a V during 100 special figure games and a big hit occurs) is set to approximately 100%.

  In this embodiment, five types of jackpots A to E are provided as jackpot types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and six or more jackpot types may be provided. The following types may be provided.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 299 of the determination value range of MR2, 0 to 49 are assigned to big hit A, and 50 To 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 is assigned to the big hit A, and 150 to 249 is assigned to the big hit B, 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit B or the big hit C at which the time-saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. I am trying to become.

  In the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, 0 to 29 out of the range of the determination value of MR2 from 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 30 Up to 99 are assigned to the big hit B, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 69 is assigned to the big hit A, and 70 to 269 is assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 199 are assigned to the big hit A, and 200 to 269 are assigned to the big hit B, 270 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hits B and C at which the time saving control is executed at the end of the big hit game is determined in the special figure game of the first special symbol. Is higher than in the case of occurrence of, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the rate of determining the jackpot type to be the big hit C is the highest, then the rate of determining the big hit B is high, and the rate of determining the big hit A is large. The lowest (big hit type determination ratio at set value 1: big hit C> big hit B> big hit A). If the set value is 2, the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot B with the highest determination ratio, then the jackpot A is determined to be higher, and the jackpot C is determined to be the lowest (set value). Jackpot type determination ratio in 2: jackpot B> jackpot A> jackpot C). Further, when the set value is 3, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the jackpot A is the highest, then the ratio of the jackpot B is high, and the ratio of the jackpot C is the lowest. (Small jackpot type determination ratio at set value 3: big jackpot A> big jackpot B> big jackpot C).

  It should be noted that depending on the set value that has been set, one or more jackpot types that have not been determined among the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot C may be present. That is, the difference in the jackpot type determination ratio depending on the set value that has been set means that any of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In the small hit type determination table, when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the small hit A, and 100 to 299 are small. It is assigned to hit B. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 149 are assigned to the small hit B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to the small hit B. I have. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 199 are assigned to the small hits A and 200 to 299 are assigned to the small hits B in the range of the determination values of MR2 0 to 299. I have. In this way, when the V winning big hit occurs during the small hit game, the rate of determining the big hit E in which the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is 100 is 20 times. It is higher than the ratio for determining the big hit D, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the small hit B is determined at a higher ratio than the small hit A as the small hit type, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. Therefore, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot E is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot D (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot E> the jackpot D). When the set value is 2, the small hits A and the small hits B are determined at the same ratio as the small hit types, so that the V prize occurs during the small hit game. The rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is equal to the rate determined to be the jackpot E based on the above (the jackpot type determination rate due to the V prize at the set value 2: the jackpot E = the jackpot D). Further, when the set value is 3, the small hit A is determined as a small hit type at a higher ratio than the small hit B, so that the V prize is generated during the small hit game. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be the jackpot D is higher than the rate at which the jackpot is determined to be the jackpot E (the jackpot type determination rate by the V prize at the set value 1: the jackpot D> the jackpot E).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a big hit and the determination ratio of the big hit type when the V prize occurs differ according to the set value. In other words, the type of the small hitting game state controlled according to the set value changes, and the type of the big hitting game state controlled when the V winning occurs may change. The game entertainment can be improved.

  Depending on the set value, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hits A and the small hits B. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the small hit type differs depending on the set value that is set means that one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. The determination of the type at a rate of 100% is also included. Further, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. When the small hit type is determined at a different rate according to the variation special map, there may be a small hit type that is not determined among the small hit A and the small hit B depending on the variation special map. That is, in order to determine the small hit type at a different ratio according to the variation special figure, one of the small hit types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%), that is, the other small hit type is determined. This includes determining at a rate of 100%. At least one of the big hit type and the small hit type may be determined by using the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. The larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is. The determination rate of the big hit type or the small hit type is not limited to one different according to the set value, and the big hit type or the small hit type may be determined by the same determination ratio for all the set values.

  The gaming ability itself is not limited to the one that does not change regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming ability may be changed according to the setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the big hit game ends based on the fact that the gaming ball passes through the third count switch during the big hit game. While the later gaming state is controlled to be a positive change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a gaming property (so-called V-variable type) in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the third count switch during the big hit game varies according to the fluctuation special map. When the set value set to is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game ball passes through the third count switch during the high base (during the time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state (so-called one two-kind mixed type) based on the. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1-3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4). When changing the playability in accordance with the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 or 4, the third count switch is used as an effect switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect every time the game ball passes through the third count switch), When the set value is 2 or 3, the third count switch is used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through the third count switch). May be used.

  The ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. The variation pattern determination table is used to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns in accordance with the result of the pre-determination. As the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation pattern result of “small hit” is determined in advance. A change pattern determination table for big hits to be used when an error occurs, and a change pattern determination table for a loss to be used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is to be “out”.

  FIG. 20-9 is an explanatory diagram of a large hit variation pattern determination table and a small hit variation pattern determination table. The jackpot variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a big hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The small hit variation pattern determination table is referred to when a variation display result is determined to be a small hit symbol to determine a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 20A shows a large hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A). The big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A) is referred to when the big hit type is big hit A. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot A), when the set value is “1”, from 0 to 997 of the determination value range of MR3, the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 300. ), 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. ing. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 is The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned, and 851 to 997 are allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  FIG. 20-9 (B) shows a change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C). The jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) is referred to when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot is 0 to 100 in the range of 0 to 997. PB1-1), 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 351 to 997 are the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Assigned to. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  The variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) have a normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1) and a super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1- 2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value to each of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the big hit A is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is higher than the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit, In addition, the setting values become lower in the order of 1, 2, and 3. In addition, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the ratio of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In this embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and when the big hit type is “big hit A”, the super reach α is determined. The determination value is assigned so as to facilitate the game, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player's expectation that the big hit B or the big hit C will be increased. I can do it.

  FIG. 20C illustrates a small hit variation pattern determination table. In the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any one of “1”, “2”, and “3”, 0 to 997 of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are small hits. (PC1-1). In the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Have been. In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from a plurality of variation patterns.

  FIG. 20-10 is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table is referred to when the variation display symbol is determined to be the outlier symbol, in order to determine the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  FIG. 20-10 (A) shows a variation pattern determination table A for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table A is referred to when the number of pending storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the time saving control is not performed in the gaming state. In the deviation variation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach A predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take for the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the reach β deviation is assigned as a judgment value.

  FIG. 20-10 (B) shows a variation pattern determination table B for outliers. The outlier variation pattern determination table B is referred to when the total number of suspended storages is 2 to 4 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the super reach β variation pattern of the loss (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 20C illustrates a variation pattern determination table C for a loss. The outlier variation pattern determination table C is referred to when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. In the outlier variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach outlier variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can take to the variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) and the super reach β variation pattern of the loss (PA2-3). I have.

  FIG. 20D illustrates a variation pattern determination table D for outliers. The loss variation pattern determination table D is referred to when the gaming state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed. In the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation deviation pattern (PA2) corresponding to the time saving control are reduced. -2) A predetermined random number in the range of the random pattern value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β deviation.

  When using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for outliers, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super-reach variation pattern, and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. It is becoming. In addition, when using the variation pattern determination tables for deviation A to D, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 out of the determination values is a super-reach α deviation variation pattern, and the super-reach β variation is 901 to 997 of the determination values regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is not assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns, that is, the super-reach fluctuation pattern is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  In addition, the “common determination ratio” refers to a case where the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment) and a case where the determination ratio is the same at different set values (for example, the set value 1 to 3 where the variation ratio of the super reach variation pattern differs by about 1%). If the fluctuation display result is incorrect, it is not limited to the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, and if the fluctuation display result is incorrect, Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach and super reach may be the same, or only the determination ratio of any fluctuation pattern of non-reach and normal reach They may be the same. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. Regardless, it is not limited to the same form, and if the fluctuation display result is a deviation, only one of the determination ratio of the super reach α deviation fluctuation pattern and the determination ratio of the super reach β deviation deviation pattern is only one. May be the same regardless of the set value. If the fluctuation display result is out-of-position, regardless of the set value, the setting value of both the super-reach α out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio and the super-reach β out-of-position fluctuation pattern determination ratio is set. It is not limited to the same form regardless of the setting. Even if the fluctuation display result is a big hit, the set value at which the fluctuation pattern determination ratio of the super reach big hit is set regardless of the set value. May be the same regardless of When the fluctuation display result is out of order, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is not limited to the form different depending on the set value that is set. There may be one or more variation patterns that are not determined among the reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included that the decision is made. The present invention is not limited to the form in which the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern for loss determination depending on the total number of pending storages. Of the first special symbol, and the number of retained storages of the second special symbol when executing the variable display of the second special symbol). May be determined.

  In each outlier variation pattern determination table, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the numerical values 1 to 3, the superreach outlier variation patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are included. The range of the assigned random numbers is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the miss probability differ according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the change display is actually executed in the super reach change pattern (the super reach difference The variation pattern appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the variation display is not limited to the form in which the rate of execution in the variation pattern of the super-reach loss differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In consideration of the loss probability, the fluctuation display may be performed in a super-reach fluctuation pattern at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-11 shows the game control data holding area 150. The game control data holding area 150 is provided in the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 and serves as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage section 151A, a second special figure reservation storage section 151B, a general figure reservation storage section 151C, a game control flag setting section 152, and a game control timer setting section. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A stores the holding data related to the variable display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning order (the detection order of game balls) with the first start winning opening with the reservation number, and sets the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The first starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A to generate a starting winning. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure has not been started yet, and the change display result in this special figure game This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B stores the holding data related to the variable display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) into the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition by passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a fluctuation display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The second starting condition is satisfied when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning is generated. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure has not been started yet and has been held. This is suspension information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur based on the (special figure display result).

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening may be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general-purpose reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general-purpose game that has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit 151C determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game ball, in association with the holding number in the order in which the game ball passed through the passage gate 41. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting section 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers. The game control counter setting section 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating a count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. The numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described. The main board 11 has information on the winning of the game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the first big win. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls by the prize at the winning opening and the second grand prize opening (attacker) are input, and the number of shot balls are totaled. The display monitor 29 displays the first grand prize opening and the total number of prize balls. The ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by the prize to the second winning port (attacker), and the number of prize balls by the prize to the second start prize port (denchu) in the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio (%), which is the ratio of the number of prize balls occupied by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers), and the base (%), which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. Is displayed. The repetition ratio is a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to prize winning in the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is defined as the number of prize balls in the total number of prize balls due to a prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls in the first prize port and the second prize port (Attacker) ( The following figure shows the ratio of the number of acquired ball). The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) is based on the number of prize balls by winning in the first and second large winning openings (attackers) and the winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew). The number of prize balls and prize balls by prize holes (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the first grand prize port, the second grand prize port (attacker) and the second start prize port (denchu). It is the sum of numbers and In addition, the first special winning opening, the second special winning opening (attacker), and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and when the passable width of the game ball is changed, the game ball is won. It is a character whose assumed ratio fluctuates. In addition, the winning opening (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the first winning winning opening, the second winning winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (denchu) is a fixed role, and The passable width of the ball is fixed, and the expected winning ratio of the game ball is a fixed character.

  As for the method of totaling and calculating the information regarding the winning of the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning ball by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. Number (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (power chew), the number of ordinary power prize balls (power chew prize balls), the first grand prize mouth and the second grand prize The number of special prize prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls by winning a mouth (attacker), is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 29 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of prize balls by winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, the number of prize balls due to winning at the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening (attacker) will be changed. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of prize balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of first winning opening and the second winning opening (attacker). If the number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning are input and totaled at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy is caused. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a storage area in which information on a game winning is stored is provided for each set value. The ball, prize ball total, and hit total are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by the prize in the second starting prize port (Den Chu) and the first prize port and the second prize port (attacker). The method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) in the case where the number of the bonuses obtained as the sum of the number of the awarded balls by winning is 42000 is described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquiring balls + number of role-acquiring balls) / total number of acquisitions] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used for the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls. The microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  A third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is rounded down to 00A410h, which is the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation. Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%. In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained bonus balls are 10 times is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired accessory balls is 19876, the calculation of the winning combination (%) is performed by dividing 34876 by 19321 and dividing the number by 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the value after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 29. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. If this is calculated by the above method, it is 32799/32799 = 100%, and if it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, an error of + 0.3% is obtained at 32799/327 = 100.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The storage area in which the information regarding the winning of the game is stored may not be initialized when the clear switch AK001 or the like is operated, and may be continuously stored. This storage area includes a ring buffer, and may constitute a 10-set total buffer, a total prize ball buffer, or the like, in which information on game winning stored in a ring buffer including ten counters of up to 2 bytes is totaled. . It should be noted that the stored value of the checksum is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display.

  When the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has to be performed again, for example, when the calculation of the connection ratio or the duty ratio has an obstacle, the display monitor clear switch different from the clear switch AK001 is operated. By doing so, data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the nonvolatile storage device such as the RAM 102 or the flash memory may be cleared. The display monitor clear switch only needs to be arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position, for example, a predetermined position of the power supply board 17, which cannot be easily operated by game room attendants or the like. When the display monitor clear switch is operated, a display monitor clear signal different from the clear signal is transmitted to the main board 11.

  The substrate case 201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property, and the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 29 are visible. The board case 201 has a not-shown hole through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 29 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 29 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and a staff member of a game arcade who wants to view the main board 11.

  The display monitor 29 displays a winning ratio (%), a link ratio (%), and a base (%) on seven segments, and switches and displays each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). I do. In this case, for example, while the winning combination (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may differ from the value of the consecutive winning combination (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed. If the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), the display cannot be performed with 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 29, a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition. In addition, it is not limited to the form in which the game media is detected by sensors provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew, and the number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. Using the sensor provided after the discharge path from which the game media having won the game media and the game media having won the electric chute are discharged is merged, based on the detection result, the number of the ball for obtaining the accessory and the number of the ball for continuously obtaining the accessory May be counted.

  The main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided. The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. Note that the number of winnings of the first winning port and the second winning port (attacker) is not limited to the form in which the number of winnings is counted by the winning counter, but the number of winnings in the first winning port is counted. A first large winning number counter and a second large winning number counter for counting the number of winnings in the second large winning opening are separately provided, and the number of winnings in the first large winning opening and the number in the second large winning opening are counted. The number of winnings may be individually counted, and the respective winnings may be summed up to be the number of winnings to the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch 26A. The second general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second general winning opening switch 26B. The third general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the third general winning opening switch 26C. The fourth general winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the fourth general winning opening switch 26D. The large winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 and the second count switch 24A.

  FIG. 20-12 shows the arrangement and display contents of the display monitor 29. The main board 11 is housed in a board case 201. The caulking pin 11B is attached to the board case 201. With the provision of the caulking pins 11B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a “swaging board case”). The display monitor 29 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 11S for certifying that the main substrate 11 has been sealed is attached to the substrate case 201. The sealing seal 11 </ b> S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 201. The sealing seal 11S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 29 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 29. Thus, the display monitor 29 is arranged at a position that is not hidden by the seal 11S.

  As shown in FIG. 20A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, a fourth display unit 29D, and a fifth display unit 29E. . Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. These first display portion 29A to fifth display portion 29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. Further, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in an extremely short cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, items of display Nos. 1 to 6 are displayed on the display monitor 29. The tally set values (1 to 3) are displayed in the first digit first display unit 29A, and the tally period is displayed in the second digit second display unit 29B and the third digit third display unit 29C. The numerical value is displayed as a percentage on the fourth display unit 29D at the fourth digit and the fifth display unit 29E at the fifth digit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done. Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once. In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 29B and the second display unit 29C are displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the fourth display portion 29D and the fifth display portion 29E display the short-term winning combination as a percentage (% display). When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. When displayed, the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative combination ratio as a percentage (% display). When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 29B and the third display unit 29C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E, the total total winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display).

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, the main board 11 is used to calculate the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening. , The total number of game balls having entered the fourth general winning opening and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are calculated. In the main processing, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24A, and the first general winning opening switch 26A to the fourth general port switch. A switch process for confirming the state of each of the winning opening switch 26D and the discharge opening switch 70 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed. In the switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch 26A is added. When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch 26B, the third general winning opening switch 26C, and the fourth general winning opening switch 26D, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, The value of the third general winning number counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 70, the value of the hit number counter is added. , Counts the entry number of game balls (winning number of game balls to each winning hole) to each entry area. The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102. As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. Switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate tallying program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  FIG. 20-13 shows a storage area for storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls due to winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port. The number of prize balls for each of the prize holes to be classified includes a general prize hole prize ball (a prize ball for winning from the first general prize port to the fourth general prize port (Sode)), a first start prize port prize ball (first prize hole). The number of awarded balls in the 1st winning prize opening (navel), the prize ball in the normal electric prize prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the electric chew), and the special electric prize ball (prize ball in the prize in the attacker) is there. The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting number are also counted. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. The number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of award balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer also has a 0-th storage area consisting of a 2-byte maximum counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin. Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning openings, for the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and for the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is constituted by a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, data of 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 can be stored. I can remember.

  The RAM 102 stores a duty combination ratio storage area for storing 10 sets and a total cumulative combination ratio and a connection ratio, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning prize number based on the winning number of the game ball to each winning port of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And the total winning combination and the connecting ratio are stored in the storing and storing portion. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios for the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. For example, when the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the ten sets and the total total are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum of 1 byte counter. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of the 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the winning openings of the 10 sets for each winning opening, and calculates the base of the calculated 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning holes for each of the ten sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. For example, when storing the bases 1 and 2 as integers, the bases 1 and 2 can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  FIG. 20-14 illustrates a memory map of the CPU 103 on the main board 11. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing a built-in register, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. Address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 are assigned to a built-in ROM area of a ROM area of a memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FBFH, of which 0000H to 2FBFH; 2FC0H to 2FFFH are program management areas). Data is read from the ROM 101 by specifying this ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H. Address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a built-in register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via the built-in register area. Is written. Address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to a built-in RAM area which is an RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to read data from the RAM 102. Write data to the RAM 102. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  FIG. 20-15 shows an RWM area serving as a built-in RAM area. The built-in RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. A storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area is configured by instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the control program to be executed (may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored. Reference data (for example, various lottery data) referred to by the control program is temporarily stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area.

  The data used to display the reams and the ratios are temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area or the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total hand combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a 1st storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of prize balls (for 10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets of connection ratio. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored. One byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address in the built-in RAM area, and each data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, management data) stores one byte. If the number of data exceeds the number of bytes (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. .

  FIG. 20-16 shows an example of display control on the display monitor 29. The main board 11 controls the display monitor 29 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. On the display monitor 29, a plurality of items are sequentially displayed.

  FIG. 20A is a time chart illustrating a mode of a display change on the display monitor 29. When the display on the display monitor 29 is started, first, the short-term ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed in red. When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. Then, when the display of the display No. 6 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, from the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6, each display is sequentially changed and displayed every 5 seconds. As for the color of the display, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. In this way, the display monitor 29 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  FIG. 20-16 (B1) shows a case where the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. In addition, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 20-16 (B2) shows a case in which the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “y” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. Further, the short-term winning ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 20-16 (B3) shows a case where the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 20-16 (B4) shows a case in which the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “A” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the total total winning combination is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 20-16 (B5) shows a case where the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  FIG. 20-16 (B6) shows a case where base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, the character “b” is displayed on the second display unit 29B, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 29C. Is displayed. The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 29D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 29E.

  The display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 can be sequentially changed for each set value based on the operation of the display changeover switch 30. I have. For example, when the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “1”, the operation of the display changeover switch 30 is performed. As a result, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “2”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the like are displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the total cumulative winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “2”. When the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed when the set value is “2”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated to The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “3”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, and the total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “3”. When the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed when the set value is “3”, the display changeover switch 30 is operated. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative total displayed on the fourth display unit 29D and the fifth display unit 29E are displayed. The display of the winning combination, base 1 and base 2 is changed to a display corresponding to the case where the set value is “1”.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to the form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. Only any two numerical values may be displayed. The present invention is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 29. The history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 29 without calculating the winning combination and the base. On the display monitor 29, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are not limited to those displayed in green. The short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative duty ratio, and the total cumulative duty ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in color.

  FIG. 20-17 shows an execution example of updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer. When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total cumulative storage area for 10 sets and the combination and combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and total ratio of the 10 sets and total. At this time, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer, and the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are respectively stored in the second storage area. Move from the storage area to the tenth storage area. For example, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th to 9th storage areas are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, “87”, “66”, “117”, and “45”, respectively. It is "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively “27”, “81” and “120”. "36" "225" "87" "66" "117" "45" "21". Accordingly, the number of award balls in the zeroth storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the tenth storage area is deleted. When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

(Explanation of game control related to other features)
FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 in this embodiment. This main processing should just be able to be performed instead of the game control main processing. In the main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step Sa1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step Sa2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step Sa3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step Sa4), the RAM 102 can be accessed. Is set (step Sa5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the clear switch AK001 is on based on a clear signal which is an output signal of the clear switch AK001 (step Sa6). If the clear switch AK001 is off, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing has been executed (step Sa7). When the power-off detection process is performed, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the parity check is normal (step Sa8). If the check result is normal, the start address of the backup setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa41), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa42). Thereby, the stored contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of the power failure regarding the progress of the game are restored.

  When the power failure is restored in step Sa42, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal which is the output signal of the lock switch 51 (step AKS001). If the lock switch 51 is on in step AKS001, the setting check process is executed (step AKS002), and the set value can be checked. In the setting confirmation processing, it is possible to confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001 or after executing the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002, the process proceeds to step Sa14. When the lock switch AK002 is off in step AKS001, a command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 182.

  When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started in step AKS002, the setting confirmation state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is entered, and the setting confirmation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is started. Command 9400H, which is a command, is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped may be set. When the game is stopped, the firing of the game ball by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, the detection of the game ball by various switches, and the like are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, The symbol display 20 may be controlled so as to stop displaying a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the execution of the setting confirmation process in step AKS001 ends, the setting confirmation state and the game stop state accompanying it end, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done.

  If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, if the power cut-off detection process has not been executed in step Sa7, or if the check result is not normal in step Sa8, the predetermined RAM is cleared. The process is executed to clear data other than the set values stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 102 (step Sa9). The storage area in which the information on the winning of the game is stored may not be cleared in step Sa9. Subsequent to step Sa9, the start address of the initialization setting table is set as a pointer (step Sa10), and an initial value is set in the work area based on the contents (step Sa11). Thereby, the storage contents regarding the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are initialized. If the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 and Sa10, so that the clear switch AK001 detects an operation of being pressed on. In addition, an operation related to initialization of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be detected.

  When the stored contents are initialized in step Sa11, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on based on the lock switch signal (step Sa12). If the lock switch 51 is ON in step Sa12, the setting change processing is executed (step Sa13), whereby the set value can be changed. In the setting change process, it is possible to check the change status of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying on the display monitor 29. When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, or after executing the setting change process in step Sa13, the process proceeds to step Sa14.

  When the lock switch 51 is off in step Sa12, a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change process is executed on condition that the lock switch 51 is turned on. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable.

  When the execution of the setting change process is started in step Sa13, the setting change state is set as a change permission state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. Then, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command is transmitted. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set to the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the execution of the setting change process in step Sa13 ends, the setting change state and the accompanying game stop state end, and a command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is done. In addition, in addition to the case where the clear switch AK001 is on, the setting is performed if the lock switch 51 is on when the power-off inspection process is not executed or the execution result of the parity check is not normal. The setting change process is not limited to the mode in which the change process is executed. The setting change process may be executed when the lock switch 51 is ON only when the RAM 102 is cleared when the clear switch AK001 is ON.

  After that, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is read (step Sa14), and the value is used as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the random number circuit 104 is initialized by the random number circuit setting process (step Sa15). Further, a setting is made to generate a periodic timer interrupt every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step Sa16). Then, the interrupt prohibition setting (step Sa17), the display random number update processing (step Sa18), the initial value random number update processing (step Sa19), and the interrupt permission setting (step Sa20) are repeatedly executed.

  The CPU 103 performs a special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process, based on a display result determination table corresponding to the set value set and numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for variable display result determination. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not to display the change display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol as "big hit" or "small hit" before the change display result is derived and displayed. Further, when executing the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is determined by using a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the set values and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination. May be determined. As described above, by determining the variable display result at a different ratio according to the set value, the game can be advanced so that the advantage for the player is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the clear switch AK001 is turned on in step Sa6 of the main processing, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11, and then in steps Sa12 and Sa13. Although the setting value can be changed, the present invention is not limited to this. The storage contents of the RAM 102 may be initialized (cleared) after the setting value changeable state ends. . That is, if the clear switch AK001 is on in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 51 is on in step Sa12, and if it is off, the process proceeds to steps Sa9 to Sa11. The stored contents are initialized (cleared). On the other hand, if the lock switch 51 is turned on in step Sa12, a setting change process is executed in step Sa13, and after the process is completed, steps Sa9 to Sa9 are performed. The process may proceed to Sa11. For example, when the RAM clear notification command is transmitted in response to the initialization (clearing) of the storage content of the RAM 102, the initialization control board 12 starts the initialization notification in response to the reception of the RAM clear notification command. Sometimes. Therefore, if steps Sa9 to Sa11 are executed before step Sa13, when the setting change processing is executed in step Sa13 and the setting value can be changed, the initialization notification is executed and the setting is changed. There is a possibility that the operation of changing the value may be affected. On the other hand, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in steps Sa9 to Sa11 after the setting change processing in step Sa13 is completed, so that the initialization notification and the like are started after the change of the set values is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

  FIG. 20-19 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting change process of step Sa13. As shown in FIG. 20A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and the power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 is terminated as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the staff at the game arcade presses the clear switch AK001 and operates the power switch AK002 while switching the lock switch 51 on, the power supply is started by turning on the power. As shown in -19 (C), on the display monitor 29, the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 are displayed on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed down by a person in charge of the game arcade or the like while the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A is sequentially updated each time the operation is detected. To display. For example, when a pressing operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, if “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A, it is updated to “2”, and if “2” is displayed, it is changed to “3”. It is only necessary to update the display to “1” if “3” is displayed, so that the display of the first display unit 29A can be sequentially updated cyclically between “1” to “3”. Thereafter, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff at the game hall or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 (update storage). I do. At this time, by blinking the first display unit 29A, a staff member of the game hall or the like notifies that the new set value has been stored so as to be recognizable.

  When the setting change process is performed in step Sa13, the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized in step Sa9. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, the hold storage based on the hold data and the like in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is deleted. When a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting change process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like. In the setting change process, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 29 is not limited to the mode in which the stored value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed. A predetermined set value such as “1” or “3”, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player, may be displayed.

  In the setting change processing, the control for sequentially updating and displaying the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29 is limited to a mode of updating each time a pressing operation of the setting switch 52 is detected. Instead, for example, each time the pressing operation of the clear switch AK001 is detected, it may be sequentially updated and displayed. For example, when the clear switch AK001 is pressed on the display monitor 29 in a state where the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 29A, “1” is displayed on the first display unit 29A. "Is displayed, the display is updated to" 2 ", if" 2 "is displayed, the display is updated to" 3 ", and if" 3 "is displayed, the display is updated to" 1 ". It is only necessary that the display on the display unit 29A can be sequentially and cyclically updated between "1" to "3". In this case, the clear switch AK001 used for initializing the storage content of the RAM 102 can be commonly used for changing the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 20-20 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002. As shown in FIG. 20A, the power switch AK002 is operated by a staff member of the game arcade or the like when the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base, and the like are displayed on the display monitor 29, and power is supplied by shutting off the power. When the display is stopped, the display on the display monitor 29 ends as shown in FIG. After that, the power supply is started by turning on the power by operating the power switch AK002 while switching on the lock switch 51 without operating the clear switch AK001 by the staff of the game arcade without pressing the clear switch AK001. As shown in 20-20 (C), the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first monitor 29A on the display monitor 29. In a state where the set value is displayed, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 29A cannot be updated and displayed even if the setting changeover switch 52 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like. Thereafter, when a switching operation for turning off the lock switch 51 is performed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the setting confirmation process ends. The CPU 103 is in a state where a game can be played by executing the processing after step Sa14 in the main processing. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to execute a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery determination lottery determination, a prize ball payout, and the like.

  As described above, the display monitor 29 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can display information relating to the game value that enables confirmation of the adjustment of the number of prize balls after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. The display monitor 29 can display information of a set value for proceeding the game so that the advantage for the player is changed by changing the probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a display device for displaying the set values separately from a display device for displaying information on the game value, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost due to an increase in the device configuration in the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 29 is used to display the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and to display the connection ratio, the ratio, the base, and the like. The present invention is not limited to this. The display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, the base, and the like using the display monitor 29 is performed, and the setting value is displayed using the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29. Is also good. This makes it possible to clearly separate the control for displaying the connection ratio, the duty ratio, the base and the like using the display monitor 29 and the control for displaying the set values using the setting display unit. Processing by a control program or the like can be dispersed and simplified, and the control load can be reduced. As described above, when the setting display unit different from the display monitor 29 is used, the setting display unit may be disposed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display monitor 29 is disposed, or the display monitor 29 is disposed. The setting display unit may be arranged on a common substrate with the substrate.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Configuration and Game Control in Other Features)
FIG. 20-21 shows a display mode of the display monitor 29 in a modification in which the setting change process can be executed during the game. The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, and the change of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by the staff of the game arcade, etc., and the clear switch AK001 and the switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 are performed. Are pressed, the operation is detected, and the display monitor 29 displays the current set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the first display unit 29A. When the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a staff member of the game arcade or the like in a state where the set value is displayed, the operation is detected and displayed on the first display unit 29A. Update and display numerical values sequentially. Then, when the lock switch 51 is pressed by a staff member of the game arcade or the like, the operation is detected, and the set value displayed on the first display unit 29A is set as a new set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

  The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is limited to a form that can be changed when the power is turned on, based on the detection of the operation of switching on the lock switch 51 and the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. Instead, it may be changeable at the time of power-on, based on at least the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. For example, even when there is no detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on when the power is turned on, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are not initialized (cleared) based on the detection of the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on. The settings stored in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed based on, for example, restoring the stored contents at the time of the power failure and detecting the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 on. As described above, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not initialized by initializing (clearing) the storage contents of the RAM 102 with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the time of power-on is not used. Control for changing the set value that has been set may be performed.

  When a new set value is stored, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the special figure on-hold storage, the general-purpose on-hold storage, the game control flag setting unit 152, the game control timer setting unit 153, the game control counter Various flags and data stored in the setting unit 154, the game control buffer setting unit 155, and the like may be deleted. In this manner, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, a change in the set value may cause a change in the display result to cause a large hit on hold memory, or the newly variable normal prize ball device 6B Can be prevented from being released (the occurrence of a normal drawing hit), and the fluctuation display result during execution can be prevented from unduly becoming a big hit. Further, by clearing the game control data holding area 150, the big win port is closed if the big hit game is being played, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed if the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is open. This can prevent the player from obtaining inappropriate profit. Further, when the setting change process is interrupted without setting a new set value, it is possible to prevent the held storage from being erased even though a new set value is not set. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the hold memory is cleared based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the set value originally set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reset. In such a case, the hold storage may be cleared. The hold storage may be cleared when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the form in which the first special winning opening or the second special winning opening is closed based on the setting of the new setting value, and the display monitor 29 displays the pachinko gaming machine 1 The first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be closed when the set value is displayed, that is, when the CPU 103 executes the setting change process. As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the change in the set value from being accurately reflected on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 20 to 22 show display modes in a modified example in which the first display unit 29 </ b> A capable of displaying the set value on the display monitor 29 is not provided. The display monitor 29 is provided with five display units from a first display unit 29A to a fifth display unit 29E, and displays the display ratio, the duty ratio, and the base displayed on the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E. The present invention is not limited to the mode in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 29A, and it is not necessary to provide a display unit for displaying the connected ratio, the winning combination, and the base set value being displayed. In FIG. 20-22 (A), the display unit 29 displays the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base on the display unit corresponding to the second display unit 29B to the fifth display unit 29E, and corresponds to the first display unit 29A. The set value is not displayed on the display unit.

  FIG. 20B shows an example of display control of connection ratio, combination ratio, and base in a case where a display unit for displaying a set value is not provided. In this case, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 are red, the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 2 are green, and the connection ratio, combination ratio, and the base at the set value 3 are blue. To display. By displaying the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base in different display colors according to the set values, it is possible to easily grasp which set value is the numerical value. In this display control example, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to switch and display the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base at the set value 1 at intervals of 5 seconds. The switching display at the interval of 5 seconds between the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is changed to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the switching display at the interval of 5 seconds at the setting value 2. Further, the connection ratio and the combination ratio at the setting value 3 It is only necessary to be able to cyclically change the display to the switching display at an interval of 5 seconds of the base. Alternatively, switching display of the connection ratio at the set value 1, the connection ratio at the set value 2, and the connection ratio at the set value 3 at 5-second intervals, the combination ratio at the set value 1, the combination ratio at the set value 2, and the setting value 3 The switching display of the duty ratio at intervals of 5 seconds and the switching display of the base at the set value 1, the base at the set value 2, and the base at the set value 3 at an interval of 5 seconds are cyclically performed for each operation of the display switch 30. Various changes may be possible.

  The display monitor 29 is not limited to a form in which the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base for each set value can be displayed, but the connection ratio, combination, and combination corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3 are set. Only the ratio and the base may be displayed. For example, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for each of the setting values 1 to 3, and the highest or the lowest value or the longest or shortest measurement time is calculated among the calculated connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. Only the value or the like may be displayed on the display monitor 29. Further, the highest or the lowest value or the value with the longest or shortest measurement time among the calculated connection ratio, combination ratio, and base is set as the initial display on the display monitor 29, and the display changeover switch 30 is operated to change the initial display from the initial display. The display on the display monitor 29 may be switchable to the value of.

  The display monitor 29 displays two or more of the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 1, the ratio, combination, and base at the set value 2, and the combination, combination, and base at the set value 3. It is possible to calculate the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base at the set value, and in addition to or instead of the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base for each set value, the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base at these two or more set values The information may be displayed on the display monitor 29. In this way, by allowing the display ratio 29, the combination ratio, and the base at the two or more set values to be displayed on the display monitor 29, it is possible to grasp the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in more detail. Note that the composite information is not limited to the form in which the combined ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are calculated for two or more set values and can be displayed on the display monitor 29. , The average value of the combination ratio and the base may be calculated and displayed on the display monitor 29.

  The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying only the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in accordance with the set values. Further, on the display monitor 29, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base according to the set value are displayed as the initial display. The display may be switched to the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base. The display monitor 29 may be able to display numerical values other than the base ratio, the winning combination, and the base, such as the number of prize balls per predetermined time (for example, one hour), as the predetermined information corresponding to the set value.

  For example, under specific conditions, such as immediately after the end of a jackpot game or during a reduced working time, by using a special fluctuation pattern determination table different from the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation display with a specific fluctuation pattern than during normal times ( For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern (PA1-4) may be easily executed. When the variation pattern can be determined using the special variation pattern determination table, the determination of the variation pattern using the special variation pattern determination table is terminated and switched to the normal determination according to the set value. The timing may be different. Specifically, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern is determined using the special variation pattern determination table until the fifteenth variation display after the big hit game ends, and the variation pattern is determined after the big hit game ends. After the first time, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table, and if the set value is 2, the special fluctuation pattern determination table is displayed until the tenth fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game. Is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. After the end of the big hit game, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the normal fluctuation pattern determination table. If the set value is 3, the big hit game is determined. The fluctuation pattern is determined using the special fluctuation pattern determination table up to the fifth fluctuation display after the end, and the fluctuation pattern at the normal time after the end of the big hit game is determined. It may be determined variation pattern using the determination table.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed in step Sa9 in the main process or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a special variation pattern is used in the first tenth variation. When the variable display is executed, it indicates that a set value (for example, set value 1) advantageous to the player is set, and after the initialization (clear) of the RAM 102 is executed, or after the pachinko game machine After the setting value set to 1 is changed, if the fluctuation display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at the 30th fluctuation, a setting value (for example, setting value 1) advantageous to the player is set. Is a game feature that focuses on whether or not the variable display is executed in a special fluctuation pattern at a specific timing or a specific number of times of the fluctuation display It may be. In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 has such a game characteristic, when the set value is 1, initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. After the set value is changed, the rate of execution of the change in the special change pattern is the highest at the first tenth change, and when the set value is 3, initialization of the RAM 102 ( After the (Clear) is executed, or after the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the rate at which the variation is executed in the special variation pattern at the first tenth variation becomes the lowest. Only when the set value is 1, the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. After, it is sufficient to change at a special variation pattern in the first 30 variation eyes is executed.

  The switching condition (the number of fluctuations before switching the table) for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern from the special fluctuation pattern determination table to the normal fluctuation pattern determination table differs depending on the set value. The ratio may be determined. Due to different switching conditions for switching the fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the set value, the determination ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, shortened non-reach (PA1-4)) decreases. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the timing, the effect of the variation pattern can be enhanced.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation display of the specific fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern) is determined by using each fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be increased or decreased as compared with the case of determining the variation pattern. In this case, the execution of the variation display of the variation pattern of the super reach is determined at different determination ratios depending on whether the set value is 1, 2, or 3. Good. As a result, after a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has elapsed since the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 was performed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 was changed, or Until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is executed, the player can pay attention to the number of times of the fluctuation display of the super-reach fluctuation pattern. Can be increased. Further, after the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is performed, or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, until a predetermined time elapses, or a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display is performed. A change pattern that can be determined only until the setting is made is provided for each set value, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided to the player by executing the change display according to the change pattern according to these set values. The notification may be made possible.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( Until the fluctuation display (for example, 100 times) is executed, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern other than the super reach such as the non-reach and the normal reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, a variation pattern different from a normal variation pattern such as a non-reach, a normal reach, a super reach, or the like (for example, an extremely short variation time of 0.1 or the like) depending on a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The determination ratio of the variation pattern or the variation pattern whose variation time is extremely long such as 10 minutes may be different.

  After the initialization (clearing) of the RAM 102 is executed or the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a predetermined time (for example, one hour) elapses, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, during a specific period until the variable display of (100 times) is executed, a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested at a rate at which a specific effect is executed. For example, it is possible to execute a high setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for a specific period. When the value is 1 (the setting value most advantageous to the player), the high setting value suggestion effect is most easily executed, and the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (the setting value most disadvantageous to the player). ), It is only necessary to make the high setting value suggestion effect most difficult to execute. In the specific period, at least one of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach, depending on whether the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the last time power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped. The determination ratio of the variation pattern may be different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a pachinko gaming machine capable of controlling the gaming state to a positively changing state after the end of the big hit game, and the game after the big hit game is terminated based on the passing of the game ball through the third count switch during the big hit game. The state may be controllable to a probable change state. In this case, as the jackpot type, a jackpot type that opens the second big winning opening during the jackpot game, that is, a jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot X) that allows the game ball to pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game, A jackpot type (hereinafter, jackpot Y) that does not open the second jackpot during the jackpot game, that is, a game ball that cannot pass through the third count switch during the jackpot game is provided, and the determination rate of the jackpot X and the jackpot Y May be changed according to the set value. By doing so, the rate at which the gaming state is controlled to be in the positive change state after the end of the big hit game can be varied according to the set value, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition to, or instead of, the rate at which the fluctuation display results in a big hit or the different rate of determining the big hit type, the number of prize balls when a game ball wins each winning opening, or the large number in each round during the big hit game The upper limit winning number of game balls to the winning opening may be made different depending on the set value. Further, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening during the big hit game may be made different depending on the set value. Thereby, the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit gaming state can be varied according to the set value, so that the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  A movable body may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a movable body effect of operating the movable body during a game such as a variable display or a big hit game may be executable. When such a movable body is provided, it is possible to execute variable winning initialization control such as confirmation of the advance / retreat operation of the regulating member inside the second big winning opening, and to confirm the operation of the movable body and to move the movable body to the initial position. The moving body initialization control to be moved can be executed by the effect control CPU 120, and when a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, (When a new set value is set to 1), the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed. Thereby, the new set value can be accurately reflected on the operation of the regulating member and the movable body. The variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be executed after execution of step Sa13 or step Sa14 in the main processing. For example, the variable winning initialization control or the movable body initialization control may be executed at the timing when the first timer interrupt occurs. When the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control can be executed, the variable winning initialization control may be started at a timing before the movable body initialization control. Alternatively, the variable winning initialization control and the movable body initialization control may be started at the same time, and the variable winning initialization control may be ended before the movable body initialization control. This makes it possible to appropriately perform the initialization control relating to the winning of the game ball.

  The determination ratio of the super reach variation pattern may be different according to the set value. The specific variable display pattern may be a variation pattern different from the variation pattern of the super reach. The setting of which variation pattern is the specific variable display pattern can be arbitrarily changed according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIGS. 20-23 and 20-24 show modified examples in which the installation positions of the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are set to the side of the main board 11. By providing the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated unless a game machine staff or the like opens the game machine frame 3. is there. In addition, by providing a security cover 500A that covers the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the pachinko machine when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is provided. The illegal change of the set value of the gaming machine 1 may be prevented.

  The security cover 500A is attached to the lower part on the right side of the outer frame 1a. Accordingly, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security switch 500A approaches the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated. It can be. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the security switch 500A is separated from the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52, so that the lock switch 51 and the setting switch 52 can be operated. The lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are covered with a cover body from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cover body is further covered with the security cover 500A from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. By covering from the back side of the gaming machine 1 (the cover body is pressed forward by the security cover 500A), the illegal change of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed is stronger. May be prevented. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a cover or a security cover 500A instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 20-25 shows a modification in which a security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the security cover 500B may be provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the gaming machine frame 3. When the game machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500B is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the game machine frame 3, and the security cover 500B is connected to the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 on the rear side. What is necessary is just to make it immovable from the state covered from the side. Then, when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be made operable by sliding the security cover 500B. When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with the security cover 500B instead of the setting switch 52.

  FIG. 20-26 shows a modification in which the security cover is provided rotatably. Specifically, the left end of the security cover 500C may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to a vertically-oriented pivot provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 3. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the right end of the security cover 500C is sandwiched between the right side of the outer frame 1a and the gaming machine frame 3, and the security cover 500C is set to the lock switch 51. What is necessary is just to make it impossible to move from the state where the changeover switch 52 is covered from the back side. When the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be operated by rotating the security cover 500C around a pivot (not shown). When the setting switch 52 is replaced with the clear switch AK001, the clear switch AK001 may be covered with a security cover 500C instead of the setting switch 52.

  When these security covers are provided so as to overlap with the main substrate 11, the security covers are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the mounting surface of the main substrate 11 and the visibility of the sealing seal are not hindered. Is also good.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 may have different gaming properties, such as a probable variable loop type and a V probable type. In the case of the probability-variable loop type or the V-variable type, a function (so-called small hit time) capable of increasing the number of balls by a small hit for opening the first big winning opening after a specific big hit game ends. You may have it. In the case of a gaming machine having a function of a small hit time, the big hit probability is changed according to the set value (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the big hit probability of the normal state is set to 1/200, and the big hit probability of the stable change state is set. Is set to 1/20, and in the case of the set value 2, the jackpot probability of the normal state is set to 1/300 and the jackpot probability of the probable change state is set to 1/30. Since the initial hit probability is higher than when other set values are set, it is easier to enter the small hit time, but the probability of a big hit during the probability change control is also higher than when other set values are set. , The small hit time is likely to end. In other words, when a small hit time function is installed in a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the probability change control, the smaller the setting value of the big hit probability in the normal state, the higher the probability of entering the small hit time, while The hit time is difficult to continue, and the smaller the set value with the lower big hit probability in the normal state, the lower the probability of entering the small hit time, while the smaller hit time is more likely to continue. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the probability variable loop type or the V probability variation type, not only can the width of the game be expanded by installing the function of the small hit time, but also a set value with a low big hit probability is set. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used, it is possible to cause the player to have an intention to play a game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the V-variable type, the opening pattern of the large winning port for determining the variable control in the round for determining the variable control is changed to the long-term opening pattern (the open pattern in which the gaming ball can easily enter the large winning port for determining the variable control). ) And the short-term opening pattern (the opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to win the large winning opening for the probability change control), the long-term opening pattern and the short-term opening pattern are determined according to the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the actual probability of intrusion (the probability of a large probability of change) may be made different by determining at different rates.

  A jackpot type determination gate is provided at a predetermined position in the game area (for example, a position above the second big winning opening), and the game ball passes through the jackpot type determination gate after the special symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot. At this timing, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination may be extracted, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type determined based on the extracted value of MR2 may be started. When the jackpot type determination gate is provided in this manner, the jackpot type is determined at a different rate according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, 16 round jackpots and 4 round jackpots are provided as jackpot types). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the ratio controlled in the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round big hit is the highest, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the 16 round jackpot is the lowest).

  The lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3. When the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 as described above, the lock switch 51, the setting changeover switch 52, or the clear switch AK001 is provided for the hitting operation handle or the hitting launching device. Providing it in the vicinity makes it impossible to operate unless the glass door frame 3a is opened.

  What is determined at a different rate in accordance with the set value may be at least as long as it is determined whether or not to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, such as at least a jackpot gaming state, The variation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Depending on the set value, determine whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit" or "small hit" at a different rate, but at the same rate regardless of the set value, big hit type In determining the change pattern or the change pattern, the change ratio of the change pattern is not changed even if the set value is changed. Therefore, the set value is not suggested to the player or the like, or is hardly suggested. When determining not only the fluctuation display result but also the fluctuation pattern at a different ratio according to the set value that is set, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern is changed when the setting value is changed, so that the player etc. A set value can be suggested or is easily suggested.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes the main processing in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that the operation by the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 is performed. According to the detection result, it is possible to control any of the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the initialization state, and the power failure recovery state. The setting change state is a change permission state in which the change of the setting value by the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is permitted. The setting confirmation state is a state in which the set value set on the display monitor 29 can be confirmed. The initialization state is a state in which the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared), unlike the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The power failure recovery state is a state in which the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure.

  FIG. 20-27 shows an example of state control according to switch detection at power-on. If the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started by turning on the power based on the operation of the power switch AK002, the setting change process is performed in step Sa13 of the main process. By being executed, the setting change state is controlled. In this case, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main processing. On the other hand, when the lock switch 51 is on and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the setting confirmation process is executed in step AKS002 of the main process, so that the setting is performed. Controls the confirmation state. In this case, step Sa9 of the main process is not executed, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is on when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized in step Sa9 of the main process, so that the initialization state is established. Control. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step Sa12 of the main process, the setting change process in step Sa13 is not executed. If the lock switch 51 is off and the clear switch AK001 is off when the power supply is started, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are restored to the contents at the time of the power failure by steps Sa41 and Sa42 of the main processing. In this way, the power outage recovery state is controlled. In this case, since the lock switch 51 is determined to be off in step AKS001 of the main processing, the setting confirmation processing in step AKS002 is not executed. In this manner, with the power-on operation using the power switch AK002, the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001 detect various operations such as on / off switching operation and pressing operation by game room attendants and the like. , The state can be controlled according to the detection results.

(Explanation of the means relating to the above-mentioned characteristic part)
The above embodiment includes the following features. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine capable of setting a set value, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a dedicated set value display unit for displaying the set value set is provided to prevent an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. There was a problem that can not be. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion for solving this problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing of Sa13) which can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A game in which a game value is given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first winning opening, a second winning opening, etc.). Value providing means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a jackpot opening process);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means;
With
The information display means can display the set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29).
According to this means 1, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying the set value, so that an increase in the cost of the game machine is prevented. Can be.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F according to a feature that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can play a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing of Sa13) which can be set to any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any one of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
A game in which a game value is given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a first winning opening, a second winning opening, etc.). Value providing means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a jackpot opening process);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 29, etc.) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means;
With
The information display means is capable of displaying a set value set by the setting means (for example, display by the first display unit 29A of the display monitor 29),
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, it is not necessary to separately provide a display device for displaying set values, so that an increase in the cost of the gaming machine is prevented. Can be. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 of the above-described feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information corresponding to a set value (for example, a portion capable of displaying a connection ratio, a winning combination, a base, etc. on the display monitor 29).
The gaming machine described in Means 1 is described. In Means 2, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 of the above feature,
The information display means can sequentially display predetermined information of each set value (for example, the display monitor 29 displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2). (A part displayed sequentially at intervals of 5 seconds, etc.)
A gaming machine described in Means 2 is described. In Means 3, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 of the above feature,
The information display means can display predetermined information of each set value in different display modes (for example, in the case of the set value 1, the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base are displayed in red, and in the case of the set value 2, the connection ratio, (The part where the role ratio and the base are displayed in green, and the setting value 3 is the part where the duty ratio, the role ratio and the base are displayed in blue)
A gaming machine described in the means 2 or 3 is described. In the means 4, it is possible to easily grasp predetermined information of each set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 of the above-described feature,
Operating means (for example, a display changeover switch 30);
The information display means can switch and display predetermined information of each set value in accordance with the operation of the operation means (for example, by operating the display changeover switch 30, the connection ratio of the set value 1, the combination ratio, the base The display is switched to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2, and the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 2 is changed to the display of the connection ratio, the duty ratio and the base of the set value 3. Switching part)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4 is described. In this means 5, predetermined information of each set value can be easily grasped.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 of the above-mentioned feature,
The information display means displays predetermined information corresponding to the set value set by the setting means (for example, a portion which can display only the connection ratio, combination ratio, and base corresponding to the set value set) Such)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5 is described, and in this means 6, a task of easily confirming predetermined information of a set value set by the setting means is easily performed. be able to.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part that calculates a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculating means can individually calculate the information for each set value (for example, a general winning prize ball, a first starting opening prize ball, a normal electric prize ball, a special electric prize ball, a total prize ball, The driving total is stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value that has been set, and can be individually calculated for each set value.
The information display means displays only the information corresponding to any one of the set values (for example, a connection ratio corresponding to any one of the set values 1 to 3; Role ratio, part that can display only the base, etc.)
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6 described above is described. In this means 7, information can be easily checked.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 of the above-mentioned characteristic portion,
Calculation means capable of calculating information on the game value provided by the game value provision means (for example, the CPU 103 has a connection ratio (%), a combination ratio (%), a total connection ratio (%), a combination A part that calculates a base (base 1 (%)) calculated based on the ratio (%) and the previous 60000 prize balls, and a base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Etc.)
The calculation means can individually calculate the individual information that is the information corresponding to each set value, and can calculate the composite information that is the information according to two or more different set values (for example, The sum of the ratios, winning combinations, bases, etc., calculated for two or more set values),
The information display means is capable of displaying the information and the composite information (for example, a part which calculates a ratio, a winning ratio, and a base at two or more set values and enables display on the display monitor 29).
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7 is described. According to this means 8, the state of the gaming machine can be grasped in more detail.
In addition, the gaming machine of the above-mentioned means 2 to 8 which can be applied to the gaming machine of the above-mentioned means 1 can also be applied to the gaming machine of the above-mentioned means F of the above-mentioned feature.

(Explanation of production control for other features)
FIGS. 20 to 28 are flowcharts illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the embodiment including the above-described feature unit. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes an initialization process (step AKS011) similar to that of the above embodiment, and then, unlike the above embodiment, executes a power-on command process (step AKS011). AKS012). After executing the power-on command processing, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013), and if it is off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment, The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS014), the command analysis process (step AKS015), and the effect control process process (Step AKS016) and effect random number update processing (Step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 20-29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 as the received command when the power supply is started, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). If the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9200H that is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). If it is not a power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not a setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a command 9400H serving as a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). If the command is not a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeats steps AKS021 to AKS024 until a reception command is acquired, and waits. If a predetermined error determination time elapses without obtaining the received command, it may be notified that an error of the received command has occurred.

  If it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is a setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start time process, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting change end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting change state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as a range or limit.

  After executing the game stop state start process in step AKS025, control for starting the setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting change notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting change notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the command received from main board 11 is command 93XXH serving as a setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is to be ended. If the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by.

  When it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change is to be ended (step AKS027; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 and end the output of the setting change notification sound by the speakers 8L and 8R. After the control of the setting change notification ends, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS029). In the processing at the time of ending the game stop state, a setting may be made to enable the command reception from the main board 11 which has been invalidated. Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification during an initialization notification period until a predetermined initialization notification time elapses. Control may be performed so that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the process may proceed to step AKS030 to execute the initialization notification. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage contents of the RAM 102 have been initialized (cleared) in response to the detection of the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 in response to the start of power supply by turning on the power.

  If it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start processing executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for the commands other than the setting confirmation end command, the setting for invalidating the reception is performed. do it. In this way, for example, it is only necessary to regulate so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, are not executed. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stop state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects accompanying the progress of the game that can be executed when the game is not in the game stop state are not executed. Is set as the range or limit.

  After the game stop state start process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a setting confirmation notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a setting confirmation notification sound. Then, the control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the command received from the main board 11 is the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined that the setting confirmation ends. If the setting confirmation end command has not been received and the setting confirmation has not been completed (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed to wait.

  When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control is performed to end the setting confirmation notification (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control so as to end the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 and terminate the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, after the control of the setting confirmation notification ends, a game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thus, the regulation may be released so that various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit, can be executed.

  Thereafter, control for executing power failure restoration notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a power failure recovery notification sound. Then, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the content stored in the RAM 102 has been restored to the content at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of power supply by turning on the power, Good.

  FIGS. 20 to 30 show the control priorities with respect to the notification and the screen display by the effect control in the present embodiment. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state with the start of power supply upon power-on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop state start processing in steps AKS025 and AKS031 of the power-on command processing. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. Therefore, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification is the highest priority among the priorities related to the effect control. For example, the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. The power saving function setting screen is displayed when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine frame 3) is set to a predetermined position as a specific position. This is a screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 5 in order to enable the presence / absence, type, and setting of the current date and time by RTC. Since the priority AKP03 for the magnet error notification and the like is lower than the priority AKP02 for the power saving function setting screen and the like, the priority AKP03 is lower than the priority AKP01 for the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Since the priority AKP0Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities related to the effect control, the priority AKP01 is lower than the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification. Degree.

  As described above, the priority AKP01 of the setting change notification or the setting confirmation notification is higher than the priority AKP02 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. When the setting is changed or the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch is temporarily switched to the specific position before the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed. Even if the output amount changeover switch is switched, the display of the power saving function setting screen is not started. In this way, the display related to the set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the setting change notification screen and the setting confirmation notification screen is displayed in preference to the display related to the output amount of the effect or the output control such as the power saving function setting screen. Thereby, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

(Explanation of Modifications Related to Effect Control in Other Features)
FIG. 20-31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control main process executed in a modification in which the setting confirmation process can be executed during the game. The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to a form that can be checked when the power is turned on, and the check of the set value may be executable during the game. In this case, after the CPU 103 starts the processing after step Sa16 in the main processing, the game machine frame 3 is opened by a staff at the game hall or the like, and a switching operation of turning on the lock switch 51 is performed. When the operation is detected, the display monitor 29 causes the first display unit 29A to display the current set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. This display is not changed even if the setting changeover switch 52 or the clear switch AK001 is pressed down by a game room attendant or the like, and serves as a display for confirming the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I have. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started during the game, a setting confirmation state is set in which the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is issued from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted. When the execution of the setting confirmation processing ends, the setting confirmation state ends, and a command 9401H serving as a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the effect control main process according to the modification, after performing the effect random number updating process in step AKS017, the in-progress setting confirmation process (step AKS01A) is performed, and then the process returns to step AKS013.

  FIG. 20-32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step AKS01A as the ongoing setting confirmation processing. For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting check is being displayed on the display monitor 29 so that the set value can be checked (step AKS051). In step AKS051, for example, after the control in step AKS058 is performed, it may be determined that the setting is being confirmed during the period until the control in step AKS060 is performed. If the setting is not being confirmed (step AKS051; No), it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS052). At this time, when the setting confirmation start command is received (step AKS052; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in progress (step AKS053). In step AKS053, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11, it is determined that the game is not in progress in a period until the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received, In other periods, it may be determined that the game is in progress.

  When it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is in progress (step AKS053; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is set to an on state (step AKS054). The in-progress setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that a setting confirmation start command has been received during the progress of the game. If it is determined in step AKS052 that the setting confirmation start command has not been received (step AKS052; No), or if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is turned on in step AKS054, the customer waiting transmitted from the main board 11 is waited. It is determined whether or not a demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055). At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been received (step AKS055; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends.

  If it is determined in step AKS055 that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step AKS055; Yes), it is determined whether or not the ongoing setting confirmation flag is ON (step AKS056). At this time, if the in-progress setting confirmation flag is off (step AKS056; No), the in-progress setting confirmation process ends. On the other hand, when the in-progress setting confirmation flag is on (step AKS056; Yes), the in-progress setting confirmation flag is cleared and turned off (step AKS057), and control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed. (Step AKS058). Even when it is determined in step AKS053 that the game is not in progress (step AKS053; No), the process proceeds to step AKS058 to perform control to start setting confirmation notification. Thus, when the setting confirmation start command is received during the progress of the game, the setting confirmation notification can be started after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received.

  If it is determined in step AKS051 that the setting check is being performed (step AKS051; Yes), it is determined whether a setting check end command has been received (step AKS059). At this time, if the setting confirmation end command has not been received (step AKS059; No), the ongoing setting confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation end command has been received (step AKS059; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS060).

  By performing such a setting confirmation process in progress, when the setting value set by executing the setting confirmation process during the game is displayed on the display monitor 29, on the side of the effect control board 12, After receiving the customer waiting demonstration display command transmitted from the main board 11, the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification voice can be started. Thereby, when the set value can be confirmed during execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the in-progress effect from being stopped, thereby preventing inconvenience due to the confirmation of the set value.

  In the case where the main board 11 performs the setting confirmation processing during the game, the setting confirmation state may be controlled after the customer waiting demonstration designation command can be transmitted. In this case, for example, a setting confirmation start command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Alternatively, instead of transmitting the setting confirmation start command together with the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a dedicated command corresponding to the setting confirmation during the game is transmitted, and after the progress of the game is completed, the set value which is set May be controlled in a state in which can be checked.

  Alternatively, the set values that are set are displayed on the display monitor 29 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and there is no need for the effect display device 5 to perform display corresponding to the set values. Therefore, when performing the setting confirmation process during the game, the display monitor 29 does not transmit a setting confirmation start command or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the display that can confirm the setting value is displayed. Control for starting may be performed. In this case, on the effect control board 12, control by the effect control CPU 120 or the like may be performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game is continued.

  In addition to the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification, the setting change completion notification and the setting confirmation completion notification may be made executable. For example, in the power-on command processing, the control change in step AKS028 ends the setting change notification, starts the setting change end notification with the start of the setting change end notification period, and ends with the end of the setting change end notification period. The setting change end notification may be ended. In the power-on command processing, the setting confirmation notification is terminated by the control in step AKS034, the setting confirmation termination notification is started with the start of the setting confirmation termination notification period, and the setting confirmation termination notification period is terminated. The setting confirmation end notification may be ended.

  In the setting change notification, control may be performed such that the setting change notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5. In the setting confirmation notification, control may be performed so that the setting confirmation notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R without displaying the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5. Alternatively, in the setting change notification, in addition to the display of the setting change notification screen and the output of the setting change notification sound, or in place of part or all, the light emitting members of part or all of the game effect lamp 9 or the game effect lamp 9 Control may be performed such that an arbitrary light-emitting member such as an information lamp provided separately from the device emits light in a predetermined setting change notification mode. In the setting confirmation notification, in addition to the display of the setting confirmation notification screen and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound, or in place of part or all, instead of part or all of the game effect lamp 9, part of the game effect lamp 9 Alternatively, control may be performed such that all light-emitting members or an arbitrary light-emitting member such as a notification lamp provided separately from the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a predetermined setting confirmation notification mode. As described above, the setting change notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be changed using an arbitrary effect device or an effect device different from the effect device. The setting confirmation notification only needs to be able to notify that the setting value can be confirmed using an arbitrary rendering device or a reporting device different from the rendering device. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the setting change notification or the setting confirmation notification is performed, and may be one in which one or both of the setting change notification and the setting confirmation notification are not performed.

  The command 93XXH serving as the setting change end command and the command 9401H serving as the setting confirmation end command are not limited to the form prepared, and a common setting end command is used as the setting change end command and the setting check end command. May be used. In this case, in the power-on command processing, in step AKS027, it is determined that the setting change is completed when the setting end command is received, and in step AKS033, the setting confirmation is ended when the setting end command is received. Then, it may be determined.

(Explanation about the feature part 71AK)
FIG. 20-33 shows a configuration example of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 regarding the characteristic portion 71AK of this embodiment. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the upper right portion of the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is operable from the outside via an opening formed in a board case accommodating the effect control board 12. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be a rotary switch that can detect a predetermined operation such as a switch changeover operation for initially setting a predetermined effect output or the like. The effect output initially set by the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 only needs to include at least the volume of the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, the light emission amount of the light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included. For example, when a game room staff opens the gaming machine frame 3, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 becomes operable. As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is a condition that the initial setting of the effect output can be changed when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. The output amount switch 71AK001 initially sets the effect output to one of a plurality of stages. Further, depending on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, it is switched using the stick controller 31A or the like whether to permit or prohibit the effect output change adjustment by the player. The effect control CPU 120 may store data indicating such effect output settings in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as output setting information.

  As shown in FIG. 20-33 (B), the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 has a total of 16 channels from “0” to “F”. The corresponding switch position can be switched. In the present embodiment, the sound volume is initially set to one of six levels according to whether the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “0” to “F”, and the sound volume is adjusted by the player. Whether to permit is switched. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is connected to the effect control CPU 120 directly or via a predetermined circuit, and a changeover switch signal indicating the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is input to the effect control CPU 120 to correspond to the channel. The switch position can be specified.

  FIG. 20-34 shows initial setting control 71AKC01 such as effect output according to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. In the initial setting control 71AKC01, for example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “5”, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is determined according to “volume 6 (maximum)”. The upper limit sound volume is initially set to “97.0”, and is controlled so that the sound volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). The volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and the output amount of an arbitrary effect device such as the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 may be initially set according to the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001. . When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “6” to “F”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player becomes impossible (prohibited), and the effect is produced by the initially set effect output. Is executed. Further, in response to the case where the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, a setting screen such as a power saving function can be displayed on the effect display device 5, and the presence or absence and type of the power saving function (power saving mode), and The value indicating the current date and time can be set (changed) by the RTC 126.

  As described above, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted. In addition, it is possible to control the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages. The effect control CPU 120 executes a process for controlling the output amount of the effect to one of a plurality of stages based on a switch signal capable of specifying the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  FIGS. 20 to 35 illustrate execution examples of the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification with respect to the characteristic unit 71AK. In this execution example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (A), as a setting change notification, a setting change notification screen 71AKD01 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. . Further, as the setting confirmation notification, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B), the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As the initialization notification, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (C), the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the characteristic unit 71AK, a power-on command process is executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main process, as in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing, the setting change notification is started by the control in step AKS026, and the setting change notification is ended by the control in step AKS028. Further, the setting confirmation notification is started by the control in step AKS032, and the setting confirmation notification is ended by the control in step AKS034. Further, by the control in step AKS030, the initialization notification starts at the start of the initialization notification period, and ends at the end of the initialization notification period. Note that the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, the setting confirmation notification screen 71AKD02, and the initialization notification screen 71AKD03 are not limited to being displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 5, but may be part of the display area of the effect display device 5. May be displayed.

  The characteristic portion 71AK is provided with an output amount changeover switch 71AK001, and can perform an initial setting such that the effect output such as volume is one of a plurality of stages corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. On the other hand, the audio output in the setting change notification, the setting confirmation notification, and the initialization notification is at the maximum volume that can be output in the pachinko gaming machine 1 irrespective of the initial setting of the volume corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. What is necessary is just to output at a certain "volume 6 (maximum)" (upper limit volume "97.0"). For example, in the setting change notification, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 for notifying a message “Setting is being changed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the setting confirmation notification, a setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 that notifies a message “Setting is being confirmed” is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume. In the initialization notification, the initialization notification sound 71AKE03 for notifying the message "initialized" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the maximum volume.

  As described above, in response to the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, the operation related to the adjustment of the effect output is detected, and based on the detection, the output amount of the effect is controlled to one of a plurality of stages. In the setting change notification serving as the notification regarding the change of the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output of the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is performed based on the maximum volume that is the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. . In the setting confirmation notification and the initialization notification, as the output of the setting confirmation notification sound 71AKE02 and the initialization notification sound 71AKE03, the notification may be performed based on the maximum volume which is a common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation related to the effect output adjustment. As described above, since the notification is performed based on the common output amount, it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed in accordance with the change or confirmation of the set value and the initialization (clearing) of the stored contents in the RAM 102.

  FIG. 20-36 shows a display example when the player volume adjustment, the power saving function setting, and the like are performed with respect to the characteristic portion 71AK. For example, when the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "0" and the effect output has not been adjusted by the player yet, the volume setting is "volume 1 (minimum)". FIG. 20-36 (A) shows a player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 includes effect images indicating six memories corresponding to six levels of volume, and changes the display color of each memory according to the current volume. For example, when the volume setting is “volume 1 (minimum)”, one memory is displayed in a first display color (for example, red), and the remaining five memories are displayed in a second display color (for example, white). . At this time, in response to the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A to the right being detected, the volume setting is changed to “volume 2”, and the first volume is set on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11. The display color memory is increased by one. In this manner, each time the first operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the first direction (right direction, etc.) is detected, a plurality of effects are produced until the effect output setting reaches the maximum. What is necessary is just to change so that the output amount may be increased by one step. On the other hand, each time the second operation of tilting the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in the second direction (left direction) is detected, the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is set until the effect output setting reaches the minimum. What is necessary is just to change it so that it may decrease by one step.

  When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is “F”, the power saving function and the value of the RTC 126 can be set. FIG. 20-36 (B) shows a power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 displayed on the effect display device 5 corresponding to this case. The power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 includes a display area for setting the power saving function and a display area for setting the value of the current date and time (current time) by the RTC 126. When the power-saving function setting screen 71AKD12 is displayed, the presence or absence and type of the power-saving function (power-saving mode) are determined in response to the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B detected by the staff at the game hall or the like. Then, the RTC 126 sets (changes) a value indicating the current date and time. The effect control CPU 120 executes processing for setting (changing) the power saving function and the like based on the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 and detection of the operation of changing each setting. For example, when "power saving mode A" is selected in the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, the control for activating the power saving function is performed only during the customer waiting demonstration in which the demonstration screen is displayed. Whatever is performed is sufficient. In the case where “power saving mode B” is set to be selected on the display of the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12, for example, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed not only during the customer waiting demonstration but also during the execution of the variable display. Any control that activates the power saving function, such as reducing the (light emission amount), may be used.

  FIG. 20-37 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic unit 71AK. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 71AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 71AKS012), similarly to the above embodiment. The initialization processing of step 71AKS011 is processing corresponding to the initialization processing of step AKS011 in the above embodiment, and the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012 is processing corresponding to the power-on processing of step AKS012 in the above embodiment. Should be fine. After executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012, unlike the above-described embodiment, the start-time output switching processing (step AKS013) is executed. Thereafter, similarly to the above embodiment, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014). If it is off (step 71AKS014; No), the process of step 71AKS014 is repeatedly executed. Wait. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 71AKS014; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 71AKS015), the command analysis process (step 71AKS016), and the effect control process process (Step 71AKS017) and the effect random number updating process (Step 71AKS018) are sequentially executed. Further, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 71AK, the in-progress output change processing (step 71AKS019) is executed, and then the process returns to step 71AKS014.

  FIG. 20-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 71AKS013 as the output switching processing at the start. In the start-time output switching process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the switch position based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS031). At this time, it is determined whether or not the specified switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032). When the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS032; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS033), and the output at the start is performed. The switching process ends. In step 71AKS033, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS032 that the switch position is “F” (step 71AKS032; Yes), control is performed to start setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the effect display device 5 displays the power saving function setting screen 71AKD12 based on control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting of the power saving function and the like. After the control for setting the power saving function and the like is started in this way, it is determined whether the setting is completed (step 71AKS035). In step 71AKS035, when the selection of the item indicating "end" is determined on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12, it may be determined that the setting is completed. If this setting is not completed (step 71AKS035; No), control corresponding to the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (step 71AKS036), and the process returns to step 71AKS035. In step 71AKS036, the display on the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 can be changed according to the detection of the operation of tilting the operation stick (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the detection of the operation of pressing the push button 31B, and the like. Control may be performed as described above.

  When it is determined in step 71AKS035 that the setting is completed (step 71AKS035; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function and the like is performed (step 71AKS037), and the output switching process at the start is ended. In step 71AKS037, for example, the production control CPU 120 stores power saving function data indicating the presence or absence of the power saving function and the type (power saving mode) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the like. Further, when a setting for changing the value of the RTC 126 is performed, data indicating the changed value is set in the RTC 126.

  FIG. 20-39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step 71AKS019 as ongoing output change processing. In the in-progress output change process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a switching permission condition has been satisfied (step 71AKS051). The switching permission condition may be predetermined as a condition for permitting adjustment of the effect output using the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 during execution of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the switching permission condition may be satisfied when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. If such a switching permission condition is satisfied (step 71AKS051; Yes), the switch position is detected based on the switch signal from the output amount switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS052). Based on this detection result, it is determined whether or not the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053). For example, the effect control CPU 120 compares the switch position indicated in the initial output setting data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the switch position specified from the changeover switch signal, and when the comparison result does not match, It is sufficient to determine that the switch position has been changed.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS053 that the switch position has been changed (step 71AKS053; Yes), it is determined whether or not the changed switch position is “F” (step 71AKS054). At this time, if the switch position is other than “F” (Step 71AKS054; No), control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is performed by adjusting the effect output according to the switch position (Step 71AKS055). In step 71AKS055, for example, initial output setting data indicating a switch position corresponding to a channel may be stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS054 that the switch position is "F" (step 71AKS054; Yes), control for starting the setting of the power saving function is performed (step 71AKS056). In this case, processing similar to steps 71AKS034 to 71AKS037 of the output switching processing at the start may be performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the setting has been completed (step 71AKS057). If the setting has not been completed (step 71AKS057; No), corresponding control is performed during the setting of the power saving function and the like (step 71AKS058), and step 71AKS057. Return to Thereafter, when the setting is completed (Step 71AKS057; Yes), control for ending the setting of the power saving function or the like is performed (Step 71AKS058).

  When the switching permission condition is not satisfied in step 71AKS051 (step 71AKS051; No), when the switch position is not changed in step 71AKS053 (step 71AKS053; No), control is performed in step 71AKS055 or step 71AKS059. After performing, it is determined whether or not the player can adjust the volume or the like based on the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 (step 71AKS060). In step 71AKS060, when the current switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is any one of “0” to “5”, the volume setting (adjustment) by the player is possible (permitted). It may be determined that the adjustment by the player is possible. If the adjustment by the player is impossible (prohibited) (step 71AKS060; No), the ongoing output change process ends. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the method of determining whether or not the switching permission condition is satisfied in step 71AKS051, and the switch position may be detected in step 71AKS052 without performing the determination in step 71AKS051.

  If it is determined in step 71AKS060 that the adjustment by the player is possible (step 71AKS060; Yes), it is determined whether an operation for changing the output amount of the effect has been detected (step 71AKS061). In step 71AKS061, for example, when the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11 is displayed, the operation of changing the effect output amount in a plurality of stages is detected based on the detection result of the operation of operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. What is necessary is just to determine whether there was. If such an operation is not detected (step 71AKS061; No), the ongoing output change process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that an operation has been detected (step 71AKS061; Yes), control for adjusting the output amount according to the detection result is performed (step 71AKS062), and the ongoing output change process ends. In step 71AKS062, when an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected on the player volume adjustment screen 71AKD11, update output setting data indicating the changed volume setting and the like are stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. It should be done.

(Explanation of Modification Example Regarding Characteristic Part 71AK)
FIGS. 20 to 40 show the control priorities for the notification and the screen display by the effect control in the modified example of the characteristic portion 71AK. The pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to change the setting with the start of power supply by turning on the power. On the other hand, when the setting is controlled to a state in which the power supply is started by turning on the power, the game may be controlled so as not to be in the game stop state. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the game stop state start process in step AKS031 of the power-on command process, and when the setting is in the check state, for example, the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is turned off. The input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position may be made valid. In this case, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is the highest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, and is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Since the priority 71AKP1Z of the normal game screen corresponding to the progress of the game at the normal time is the lowest priority among the priorities relating to the effect control, the priority AKP11 of the setting change notification and the setting screen for the power saving function etc. The priority is lower than the priority 71AKP12 and the priority AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification.

  As described above, the priority 71AKP11 of the setting change notification is higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the power saving function setting screen or the like. Therefore, when the control to start the setting change notification is performed in step AKS026 of the power-on command processing, Before the end of the setting change, even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position of “F” even if the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected. First, the display of the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 is not started. On the other hand, the priority 71AKP13 of the setting confirmation notification is lower than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen for the power saving function or the like, and therefore, when the control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed in step AKS032 of the power-on command processing. When the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is switched to the specific position “F” before the end of the setting confirmation, the power saving is performed based on the detection of the operation of switching the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. The display of the function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 may be started. As described above, when the setting value is changed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount is not executed, while when the setting value is confirmed, the control for switching the initial setting of the effect output amount may be executed. . Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be appropriately controlled together with the confirmation of the set value.

  By executing the power-on command processing in step 71AKS012 and then executing the start-time output switching processing in step 71AKS013, it is possible to detect the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 in the setting change state. Regardless, the present invention is not limited to the mode in which the control of the output amount of the effect is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount switch 71AK001 is detected in the power-on command processing. When the operation is detected, information indicating the switch position can be specified is stored, and after the setting change state is completed, the output amount of the effect is controlled based on the stored information. May be used. For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, if it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has not been completed, the switch position is specified based on the changeover switch signal from the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. At this time, information indicating the result of specifying the switch position is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. After that, in step 71AKS031 of the start-time output switching process, the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 may be specified based on the information indicating the result of specifying the switch position. Also in this case, in the setting change state, it is possible to restrict the control of the output amount of the effect from being performed regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001.

  Alternatively, in the case of the setting change state, it is determined whether or not the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is "F" or not, and whether or not the switch position is the specific switch position is determined. Alternatively, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01 on the effect display device 5 may be given priority over the control for displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12 on the effect display device 5. In this case, when the setting change notification ends by the control in step AKS028 of the power-on command processing, the control for displaying the setting change notification screen 71AKD01, which has been performed with priority, on the effect display device 5 also ends. It is only necessary that the display device 5 can start displaying the power saving function etc. setting screen 71AKD12.

  Unlike the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a detection device capable of detecting an operation performed by the player in a predetermined operation is provided, and a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed based on the detection of the operation by the detection device. Is also good. For example, in addition to or instead of the lock switch 51 and the clear switch AK001, a setting value change switch capable of detecting an operation such as a switching operation or a pressing operation by the player is provided, and the operation of the player is detected by the setting value changing switch. , The set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed in the same manner as when the operation is detected by the clear switch AK001.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic portion 71AK, the power-on command processing is executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment in step 71AKS012, and the start-time output switching processing is executed in step 71AKS013. In the power-on command processing, a game stop state start processing is executed in, for example, step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the input of the changeover switch signal that can specify the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is also invalidated, and the adjustment of the effect output according to the switch position and the display of the setting screen 71AKD12 such as the power saving function are not performed. The control based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is restricted (prohibited). In this way, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, regardless of the detection of the operation related to the adjustment of the output amount of the effect, The execution of the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount is restricted (prohibited). Accordingly, the control for changing the set value has priority over the control for switching the initial setting of the output amount of the effect, so that it is possible to prevent the change of the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control CPU 120 is provided on the effect control board. The output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is provided on the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 is mounted, and receives an operation related to adjustment of the output amount of the effect by the knob 71AK002. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 71AK, the power-on command process is executed in step 71AKS012, and then the start-time output switching process is executed in step 71AKS013. In the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013, control is performed at step 71AKS033 to switch the initial setting of the effect output according to the switch position, or control is performed at steps 71AKS034-71AKS037 to set the power saving function and the like. In this manner, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, if the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 is detected before the setting change state ends, After the setting change state ends, control is performed to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. This makes it possible to appropriately switch the initial setting of the output amount of the effect in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When the setting change notification is performed by the display screen of the effect display device 5 or the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the setting change notification sound 71AKE01 is output regardless of the initial volume setting corresponding to the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001. Is output at the maximum volume that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, the notification is performed using the common output amount regardless of the detection of the operation of changing the switch position of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001, thereby preventing the trouble of the setting value changing operation. Can be prevented from being performed. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 71AK)
Regarding the above-described feature portion 71AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine capable of changing settings related to effects, there is a gaming machine described in, for example, JP-A-2015-29614. However, in the technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-29614, while changing a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage, control when changing the setting of the effect is not considered. Was. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to adjustment of an effect output amount;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). Effect control CPU 120 or the like for executing processing).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

In addition, as a gaming machine of means F related to the feature portion 71AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and the gaming machine described in JP 2015-29614 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting change of the set value by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect-adjustment detecting means (for example, an output-amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to adjustment of an effect output amount;
Output amount control means for controlling the output amount of the effect to any one of a plurality of stages based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the output switching process at the start of step 71AKS013 or the output change process in progress of step 71AKS019). Effect control CPU 120 to be executed), and
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the control by the output amount control means regardless of the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means when the change is permitted, (for example, step AKS012 is executed as the power-on command processing of step 71AKS012). Effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes processing).
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, execution of the control by the output amount control means is restricted when the change is permitted, so that the operation of changing the set value is hindered. Can be prevented. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling execution of effects in accordance with the progress of the game;
An effect control board provided with the effect control means (for example, effect control board 12 or the like),
The effect control board further includes a receiving unit (for example, a knob 71AK002 of the output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) for receiving an operation detectable by the effect adjustment detecting unit.
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
The output amount control means, when an operation is detected by the effect adjustment detecting means before the change permission state ends, after the change permission state ends, the operation by the effect adjustment detection means ends. Is controlled to the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of (for example, execution of the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013),
The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 71AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value while appropriately controlling the stage of the output amount of the effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
Unlike an operation performed by a player during a game, an initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of a gaming machine is provided.
In the change permission state, the set value by the setting means can be changed according to the detection of the operation by the initialization detecting means (for example, when a clear switch AK001 is used instead of the setting changeover switch 52, etc.). ),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value without separately providing a configuration for changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A change notifying unit (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, etc.) for notifying a change of a set value by the setting unit;
The change notification means performs notification (for example, output of a setting change notification sound 71AKE01 or the like) with a common output amount regardless of detection of operation by the effect adjustment detection means.
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the set value due to an improper act and prevent a trouble in a work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The output amount control means,
When in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to control the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means (for example, the setting confirmation notification higher than the priority 71AKP13. Priority 71AKP12 etc.),
When the change is allowed, the stage of the output amount of the effect based on the detection of the operation by the effect adjustment detecting means is not controlled (for example, the priority of the setting change notification higher than the priority 71AKP12 of the setting screen such as the power saving function). 71AKP11 etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 71AK.
In such a configuration, the stage of the output amount of the effect can be controlled together with the confirmation of the set value, but the stage of the output amount of the effect is not controlled when the set value is changed. Problems can be prevented from occurring.
The gaming machine of the means 2 to the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 71AK which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 71AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F according to the characteristic portion 71AK. .

(Explanation about the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 20-41 shows an execution example of the power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member serving as a first movable effect device and a second movable member serving as a second movable effect device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). From the retracted position, it rises diagonally to the right, stops at the advanced position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then performs an operation effect of returning to the retracted position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time, with the time of origin being the united closed state. The rotating mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5. Thus, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the first to third split pieces are opened by the operating motor AK012. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third fragments cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member is slid laterally by the operation motor AK013 after the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces are rotated to the advanced position. The slide mechanism of the first movable member sets the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces on the left side of the effect display device 5 with the time when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5 as the origin position. It is only necessary to be able to slide between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops at the position above the effect display device 5 as the origin position (retreat position). After descending from the evacuation position and stopping at the advance position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, an operation effect of returning to the evacuation position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the evacuation position, which is the origin position, to the advancing position slightly above the display screen center of the effect display device 5, and is raised from the advancing position to the evacuation position. In this way, the second movable member performs an effect operation of simply reciprocating up and down by the driving force of the operation motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin positions of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the advance position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left or right position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the origin position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation for performing an operation similar to a normal effect operation during execution of an effect accompanying the progress of a game. By performing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a failure occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation in which a part of the operation in the normal effect operation is omitted, and is a return operation for returning the first movable member and the second movable member to the origin positions.

  When the long initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by a solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Is moved to an overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5 which is the advanced position. Subsequently, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the closed state at the origin position to the open state by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Thereafter, as shown by a broken arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as shown by solid line arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013, and then moved to the left movable position. Then return to the origin position. Then, as shown by the solid line arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retreat position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK014 from the origin position (retreat position) to the original position (retreat position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, an operation in which a part of the long initial operation is omitted may be performed. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control for executing the operations indicated by the broken-line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, and 72AKM09 is performed. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 is required. Also, in the long initial operation, the operations of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the operations of the second movable member are performed so that the moving amount is larger than the operations indicated by the broken arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. May be performed. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved so that the movement amount is smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added according to the detection result by the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, the operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state, which is the origin position, is indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM03. The operation motor AK012 is driven to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. Thereafter, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is turned off once and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. The second movable member may be moved as indicated by broken-line arrows 72 AKM 08 and 72 AKM 09, and the operation motor AK 024 may be driven so that the origin sensor AK 024 is once turned off and then turned on.

  FIG. 20-42 shows a control pattern used for driving the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data constituting these control patterns may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a production operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns of the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute a short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The effect operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first effect executed with the progress of the game, such as a reach effect, for example. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute an operation of a movable member included in a second production different from the first production performed in accordance with the progress of the game, such as a notice production, for example. . As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIGS. 20 to 43 are flowcharts illustrating an example of a power-on command process executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). If it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform control for executing a return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is the change permission state. Note that, even in a period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS008 or later, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008), similarly to the above embodiment. If the setting change is not to be ended (Step 72AKS008; No), Step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By performing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation as the initial operation is executed following the short initial operation as the return operation. No control can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and control for executing a long initial operation is performed. (Step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  If it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Subsequently, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By performing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position when in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after the process proceeds to step 72AKS018 or later, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for performing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting check is to be ended, similarly to the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). If the setting check is not completed (Step 72AKS018; No), Step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, unlike the above-described embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation as the return operation when the setting is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power failure restoration designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and control for executing a long initial operation is performed. Is performed (step 72AKS023), and the power-on command processing ends. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 is completed. By performing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation is the initial operation following the short initial operation which is the return operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of Modified Example Related to Characteristic Part 72AK)
FIG. 20-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on command processing executed in the modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS032), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014 to perform control for executing the initialization notification. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply by turning on the power. Correspondingly, the control in step 72AKS014 is executed to execute the initialization notification. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation can be performed. . Also, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that the setting change state as the change permission state ends and the short-circuit operation in which the return operation is performed. Subsequent to the initial operation, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed. As described above, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state ending process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in common steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modified example, when it is determined in Step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (Step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in Step 72AKS020. Thereafter, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is terminated. If it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is a power outage restoration designation command, the power stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is restored to the stored content at the time of the power outage with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such a power failure recovery is performed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the recovery operation is performed. it can. Further, even after executing the game stop state end processing in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the setting confirmation for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. After the end of the state, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation following a short initial operation as a return operation can be performed. As described above, the control in the common steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in the step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end processing is executed in the step 72AKS020. In addition, control can be performed to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the short initial operation and the long initial operation, control may be performed in response to initialization notification, or control may be performed without initialization notification. In the short initial operation and the long initial operation, control may be performed when power failure recovery notification is performed, or control may be performed without power failure recovery notification. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation can be performed, In an effect associated with the progress of the game, it is only necessary to be able to operate in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be any ones arbitrarily specified according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position. The control for executing the return operation for returning to the state is performed. Thereby, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work for changing the set value is not hindered by the movable member, and the work for changing the set value is performed. Can be prevented from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed, and the short initial operation as a return operation is performed. Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting change state, the execution of the setting change notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting is in the setting confirmation state. As described above, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, is not performed, and the setting value change operation is not hindered. It is possible to prevent trouble in changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  If it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, control is performed to execute a long initial operation in step 72AKS011. In this way, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Thus, when it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value, it is possible to prevent useless operation of the movable member and reduce a control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing according to the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform a return operation. After the short initial operation, control is performed to execute a long initial operation, which is an initial operation. At this time, by performing the control in step 72AKS014, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be terminated, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, so that the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, in step AKS017, control for executing the short initial operation is performed. In this manner, when the power supply is started and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the movable members such as the first movable member and the second movable member are moved to the origin position. The control for executing the return operation for returning to the state is performed. Thereafter, if it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, control is performed to execute a long initial operation in step 72AKS021. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. If the long initial operation, which is the initial operation, is performed in the setting confirmation state, the execution of the setting confirmation notification is hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and control for executing the long initial operation is not performed when the setting confirmation state is established. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the set value can be easily checked by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being performed when the setting is in the check state. To do. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 72AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 72AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154 do not consider a case where a change in setting and an operation of a movable member conflict with each other. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in an operation of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control means performs control for executing the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is performed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent the change of the set value from being hindered.

In addition, as a gaming machine of the means F related to the characteristic portion 72AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-22154 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least a movable control means (for example, a step) capable of controlling a return operation (for example, a short initial operation or the like) for returning the movable member to the origin position and an initial operation (for example, a long initial operation) by the movable member. Effect control CPU 120 for executing command processing at power-on of AKS012).
The movable control unit performs control to execute the return operation when the change is permitted (for example, execution of step 72AKS007).
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, a return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is performed when the change is permitted, so that the setting value can be changed. Problems can be prevented from occurring. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008).
The game machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 72AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the movable member from performing the initial operation when the change is permitted, thereby preventing trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control for executing only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, useless operation by the movable member can be prevented, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notifying means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 72AKS014). Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the end of the change permission state, control for executing the initial operation following the return operation is performed (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031, 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, a CPU 103 that executes a setting confirmation process in step AKS002) capable of controlling a setting confirmation state for confirming a setting value set by the setting unit;
The movable control means,
In the setting confirmation state, control for executing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control for executing the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK.
With such a configuration, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed in the setting confirmation state, so that the set value can be easily confirmed and the trouble of changing the set value can be prevented.
The gaming machine of the means 2 to the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F relating to the characteristic portion 72AK. .

(Explanation about the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 20-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the operation content of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as the content of the characteristic portion 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the command received from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). If it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. .

  If it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 73AKS009, control to execute the short initial operation is performed. (Step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (Step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation. Can be controlled. In addition, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of power supply, control for executing a short initial operation as a return operation after the setting change state ends can be performed. Alternatively, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled along with the start of power supply, after the setting change state ends, the short initial operation as a return operation is followed by the long initial operation as an initial operation. Control for executing the operation can be performed.

  Thereafter, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation may be performed. Alternatively, after performing control to execute the short initial operation, control to execute initialization notification may be performed, and then control to execute the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), similarly to the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Subsequently, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Note that, even in the period after proceeding to step 73AKS016 or later, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously performed until the short initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Subsequent to the control in step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016). If the setting check is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by. If it is determined in step 73AKS016 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing ends. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed, the long initial operation as the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation as the return operation when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is established. Is not performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is a power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control for executing a short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and control for executing a long initial operation is subsequently performed. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing ends. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 is completed. By executing the controls in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of power supply, the long initial operation as the initial operation follows the short initial operation as the return operation Control for executing the operation can be performed. Note that, even after the power-on command processing is completed, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously performed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 20-46 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification for the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying a message of "setting is being confirmed" is displayed, and a history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of the setting values may be cumulatively stored on the effect control board 12 side by storing the set value information together with the RTC information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Alternatively, the history of the set values is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information in a predetermined area together with the RTC information in a non-volatile storage device (for example, a flash memory) provided separately from the RAM 122. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, the setting value history is stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 in a backup area together with the setting value information in the backup area, and a setting confirmation start command is transmitted. By transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying a history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 side supplies power. May be specified at the start of the process.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5 and grasp the history of the set values. It becomes difficult to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation for returning the member to the origin position. As described above, when the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation state in response to the start of the power supply, unlike the case of being controlled to the setting change state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by the staff at the game hall or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. In this case, the control for executing the long initial operation as the initial operation following the short initial operation as the return operation is not performed. As described above, when the setting is controlled in the setting confirmation state in response to the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation as the return operation is performed, while the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after the staff of the game hall or the like can easily grasp the history of the set values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of the set values from becoming difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  It should be noted that the history of the setting values may be displayed even when the setting is changed to the changing state. In this case, control may be performed to execute a short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position when the setting change state is set as the change permission state. In this way, when the setting value is controlled in accordance with the start of the power supply and the history of the setting values can be displayed, the short initial operation which is the return operation is performed, and the setting value is set. May be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS010. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended. Accordingly, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation, which is the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position, is not performed, so that the change operation of the set value is not hindered by the return operation. In this way, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, so that the control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. As described above, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. An operation of appropriately returning the member to the origin position can be performed.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the short initial operation as a return operation Subsequently, control for executing a long initial operation as an initial operation is performed. At this time, the control for executing the initialization notification is performed by performing the control in step 73AKS012. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in accordance with the start of the power supply by turning on the power, so that when the game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the initialization notification is given. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation as a return operation and a long initial operation as an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed, so that the long initial operation as the initial operation is performed following the short initial operation as the return operation. Perform control. Thereby, in order to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value, the operation of the movable member can be shared, and the control load for operating the movable member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, the history of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, if it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, control is performed in step 73AKS015 to execute the short initial operation. Thus, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of the setting values, is being displayed, the control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation is performed. This makes it possible to easily grasp the setting confirmation display in order to prevent trouble in changing the setting value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  The effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H serving as the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, it is determined that the received command is the setting change start command. The command 9100H serving as a setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H serving as a RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H serving as a power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H serving as a setting check start command. Thus, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the setting value is permitted, a command as information different from the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted. Is done. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load regarding the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 73AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, JP-A-2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for returning a movable member to an origin position, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-200902 and 2016-22154 do not consider a case where a change in setting and an operation of a movable member conflict with each other. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for performing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation of returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the change permission state, it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

Further, as a gaming machine of means F related to the characteristic portion 73AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-22154 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
A movable member operable in accordance with the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, and the like);
At least movable control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a power-on command process in step AKS012) capable of executing a return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position,
The movable control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control for performing the return operation is performed (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009),
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, a return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not executed when the change is permitted, which hinders the operation of changing the set value. Can be prevented from occurring. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK,
The movable control means performs control for executing the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately operate the movable member and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the gaming machine is initialized with the start of power supply, initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012) Etc.)
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012),
After the end of the change permission state, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 73AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by sharing the operation of the movable member, and to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
Setting display means (for example, effect display device 5 or the like) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of the set values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01).
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation when the setting confirmation display is being executed, and does not perform control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015 and 73AKS016).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped, and there is a problem in the work of changing the set value. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a command analysis process of AKS015) for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means,
The game control means transmits information (for example, a command 9100H serving as a setting change start command) different from the case of not being controlled to the change permission state when being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing work from being hindered.
Note that the gaming machines of the means 2 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK applicable to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK can also be applied to the gaming machines of the means F relating to the characteristic portion 73AK. .

(Explanation about the characteristic part 74AK)
FIG. 20-47 shows an example of the configuration of the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used for executing the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK of the present embodiment. The pattern data constituting the effect control pattern 74AKP01 may be stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 in advance. The confirmation effect is controlled to be executable based on establishment of a predetermined confirmation effect condition after power supply is started by turning on the power. The confirmation effect of the characteristic unit 74AK includes the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet from the left speaker 8L twice, the output of the confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the drum twice from the right speaker 8R, and the output of the stick controller 31A. Confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) in a predetermined pattern is included. The effect control pattern 74AKP01 includes data indicating the confirmation effect process timer initial value 74AKJ00, and enables setting of the initial value of the check effect process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example. Further, in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ01, second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 associated with the confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKJ02, confirmation The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 associated with the effect process timer determination value 74AKJ03 is included. The first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the sound of the trumpet twice from the left speaker 8L. The second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02 is used to control the output of a confirmation sound for outputting the drum sound twice from the right speaker 8R. The third confirmation effect control data 74AKD03 is used for controlling confirmation vibration for driving two sets of vibration motors built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A in a predetermined pattern. When controlling the execution of the confirmation effect, the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer is updated, and when any one of the confirmation effect process timer determination values 74AKJ01 to 74AKJ03 is matched, the first to third confirmations corresponding to the matched determination values are performed. By performing the control using the effect control data 74AKD03, it is possible to output the confirmation sound and execute the confirmation vibration.

  During the execution of the confirmation effect, a part or all of the light emitting members included in the game effect lamp 9 may be turned on. For example, when the confirmation effect is started, the lighting of the light emitting member is started, and the output of the confirmation sound is started from the left speaker 8L. When the output of the confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L is completed, the output of the confirmation sound from the right speaker 8R is started. When the output of the confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R ends, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A starts. Then, the confirmation vibration by the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A ends, the light emitting member is turned off, and the confirmation effect ends. In the confirmation effect, after the power supply is started by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected within a predetermined confirmation reception period, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. Then, the execution is started. Production of any one of output of a confirmation sound by the left speaker 8L, output of a confirmation sound by the right speaker 8R, and confirmation vibration by a vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A. Is performed, the control for executing another effect is not performed. As described above, when any one of the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration included in the confirmation effect is performed, the control may be performed so as not to execute another effect. Since the output of the confirmation sound and the confirmation vibration are performed at different timings in this way, it is easy for the staff in the game hall or the like to easily determine whether or not the production using each production device can be normally performed. Can be.

  20 to 48 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 for the characteristic unit 74AK. This effect control main process may be performed as long as it can be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the effect control CPU 120 executes the initialization process (step 74AKS011) and the power-on command process (step 74AKS012) in the same manner as the above embodiment, and then sets the timer interrupt flag to ON. Is determined (step 74AKS013), and if it is off (step 74AKS013; No), step 74AKS013 is repeatedly executed to stand by. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on (step 74AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step 74AKS014), command analysis processing (step 74AKS015), and effect control process processing (Step 74AKS016) and the effect random number updating process (Step 74AKS017) are executed in order. Further, in the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the confirmation effect control process (step 74AKS018) is executed, and then the process returns to step 74AKS013.

  FIG. 20-49 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step 74AKS018 as the confirmation effect control processing. In the confirmation effect control process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031). For example, in the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, the initialization notification is started by performing the control in step AKS030. Thereafter, when the determination in step 74AKS031 is made first, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started. An initialization notification start flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and when the initialization notification start flag is on, it may be determined that the initialization notification has started.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the start of the initialization notification has been started (step 74AKS031; Yes), control for starting the confirmation reception period is performed (step 74AKS032). The confirmation reception period may be started when the initialization notification is started, and may be ended when a predetermined confirmation reception time such as 30 seconds or 1 minute elapses.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS031 that the initialization notification has not been started (step 74AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation acceptance period has been reached (step 74AKS033). If the confirmation reception period is started in step 74AKS032 or if it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display is started (step 74AKS033; Yes). 74AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the variable display has been started by receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS034; Yes), control for canceling the confirmation acceptance period is performed (step 74AKS035), and the confirmation effect control process ends. As described above, when the variable display is started during the confirmation reception period, the confirmation reception period is stopped, and the restriction is made so that the confirmation effect condition is not satisfied. By canceling the confirmation reception period along with the start of the variable display, it is possible to control the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect so that the confirmation effect is appropriately executed.

  When it is determined in step 74AKS034 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS034; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 74AKS036). In step 74AKS036, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected, it may be determined that the operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected. At this time, if there is no motion detection (step 74AKS036; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the motion is detected (step 74AKS036; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 used to execute the confirmation effect is read from a predetermined area of the ROM 121 (step 74AKS037), and the confirmation effect process is performed. The timer initial value 74AKJ00 is set as the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS038). In addition, it is set so that the timer value is determined based on the first confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 (step 74AKS039), and the process proceeds to step 74AKS046. If it is determined in step 74AKS036 that an operation has been detected and a setting for executing a confirmation effect is performed, control for ending the confirmation reception period may be performed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS033 that it is not the confirmation reception period (step 74AKS033; No), it is determined whether or not a confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040). In step 74AKS040, for example, when the measurement of the elapsed time by the confirmation effect process timer has started, it may be determined that the confirmation effect is being performed. At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 74AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 74AKS040; Yes), it is determined whether the variable display has been started (step 74AKS041). If it is determined that the variable display is to be started (step 74AKS041; Yes), control for stopping the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS042), and the confirmation effect control process ends. In this way, when the variable display is started during the confirmation effect, by stopping the execution of the confirmation effect, control is performed so that the execution of the effect accompanying the progress of the game and the execution of the confirmation effect do not overlap. , The confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS041 that the variable display has not been started (step 74AKS041; No), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 74AKS043). Next, it is determined whether or not a timeout has occurred in the confirmation effect process timer (step 74AKS044). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 74AKS044; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 74AKS045), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 74AKS044; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 74AKS046). If it does not match the determination value (step 74AKS046; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 74AKS046 that it matches the determination value (step 74AKS046; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 74AKS047). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 74AKS048), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  FIGS. 20 to 50 are timing diagrams and the like showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 74AK. 20-50 (A) shows that the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected when the power supply is started by turning on the power, but the operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is not detected. Correspondingly, a case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. 20-50 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 20-50 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power is not turned on at the timing 74AKT01 and the setting is not controlled, the effect control board 12 determines that the effect control CPU 120 receives the RAM clear notification command at the timing 74AKT02, for example. . In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step AKS021, the control in step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. Then, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of feature unit 74AK, it is determined that the initialization notification is to be started in step 74AKS031, and the confirmation reception period is started by the control in step 74AKS032. You. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT03 within the confirmation detection period, it is determined that a confirmation effect start operation has been detected at step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT04, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  On the other hand, in the case where the control is changed to the setting change state with the start of power supply by turning on the power at the timing 74AKT11, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues a setting change start command at the timing 74AKT12. It is determined that it has been received. In the power-on command processing of the above-described embodiment, since the received command is determined to be the setting change start command in step AKS023, the game stop state start processing in step AKS025 is executed, and then the control in step AKS026 is performed. Is performed, and the setting change notification is started. At this time, except for receiving the setting change end command, control for continuously executing the setting change notification is performed, and control for executing the initialization notification is not started. After that, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 74AKT13, it is determined that the setting change is ended in the step AKS027 of the power-on command processing, so that the steps AKS028 and AKS029 follow. , The control of step AKS030 is performed, and the initialization notification is started.

  In this way, when the initialization notification by the control of step AKS030 is started at timing 74AKT13, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018 included in the effect control main process of the characteristic portion 74AK, the initialization notification is performed at step 74AKS031. Is started, and the control in step 74AKS032 starts the confirmation reception period. Therefore, at timing 74AKT13, the confirmation reception period starts with the start of the initialization notification. When an operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 74AKT14 within the confirmation reception period, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected in step 74AKS036 of the confirmation effect control process. The control for executing the confirmation effect, such as steps 74AKS037 to 74AKS048, is started. When the control for executing the confirmation effect is started in this manner, a plurality of types of first to third confirmation effects are provided using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01. The effects are executed in order. Thereafter, at timing 74AKT15, it is determined in step 74AKS044 of the confirmation effect control process that the confirmation effect process timer has timed out, and the control in step 74AKS045 is performed, thereby ending the confirmation effect.

  The effect included in the confirmation effect may be an effect using any effect device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in addition to or instead of the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the operation rod (lever) of the stick controller 31A, the confirmation vibration by driving the vibration motor built in the push button 31B. May be executed.

  As described above, in the effect control main processing of the characteristic unit 74AK, the power-on command processing is executed in step 74AKS012 in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and then the confirmation effect control processing is executed in step 74AKS018. In the power-on command processing, a game stop state start processing is executed in, for example, step AKS025 or step AKS031. After the game stop state start process is executed, the reception of a command different from the setting change end command or the setting confirmation end command is invalidated, and regulation is exercised so that control relating to normal effects is not executed. In this case, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step AKS030, control is performed to execute initialization notification. Thereafter, in the confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018, when the confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on, for example, determining that the initialization notification has been started in step 74AKS031, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the subsequent steps to execute the confirmation effect. Perform control to be executed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed. Thereby, the control for changing the set value is given priority over the control for executing the confirmation effect, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the work for changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  In the power-on command processing, control in steps AKS025 to AKS030 is performed in accordance with the setting change state. After that, by executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, the control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the check effect condition after the setting change state as the change permission state ends. Do. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. In the confirmation effect control process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the confirmation acceptance period is reached, and thereafter, in step 74AKS036, it is determined that the start operation is detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. . This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  When executing the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process of the characteristic unit 74AK, the control in step 74AKS032 is executed, so that the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) without being controlled to the setting confirmation state. ), The confirmation reception period is the same as the case where the setting confirmation state ends. The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period. Thereby, in order to prevent a trouble in the work of changing the set value, it is possible to standardize the control regarding the execution of the confirmation effect and reduce the control load of the confirmation effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

  The effect control pattern 74AKP01 used in the characteristic portion 74AK includes the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 and the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02, thereby enabling control to output a confirmation sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Thus, the confirmation effect includes the output of the confirmation sound by the speakers 8L and 8R serving as the sound output means. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the setting value changing work from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately set the set values.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 74AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 74AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. For this reason, there is a possibility that the operation of changing to a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player may be affected. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in a work of changing a set value,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing a confirmation effect control by the effect means based on establishment of a confirmation effect condition; With
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021, AKS030, etc. ),
When the change permission state is set, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect is not executed in the change permission state, so that it is possible to prevent trouble in the work of changing the set value.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means F related to the characteristic portion 74AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-220833 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, a confirmation control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a confirmation effect control process of step 74AKS018) capable of executing a confirmation effect control by the effect means based on establishment of a confirmation effect condition; With
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after execution of steps AKS021, AKS030, etc. ),
When the change is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect is not performed (for example, execution of steps AKS025 to AKS029),
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to the means F, the confirmation effect is not executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to prevent a trouble in the operation of changing the set value. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 74AKS018 after executing steps AKS025 to AKS030, and the like). ),
The game machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect, and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by the player;
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detection means during the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 74AKS036).
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 74AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect, and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
The confirmation control means, when initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, when the change permission state ends, the confirmation effect condition in a common confirmation reception period The control for executing the confirmation effect is performed according to the establishment (for example, execution of steps 74AKS033 and 74AKS036),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, the execution of the confirmation effect is made common, and it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a production sound,
The confirmation effect includes an output of a sound for confirmation by the sound output means (for example, execution of step 74AKS047 using the first confirmation effect control data 74AKD01, the second confirmation effect control data 74AKD02),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 74AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect, and to prevent trouble in changing the set value.
The gaming machine of the means 2 to 5 relating to the characteristic section 74AK applicable to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic section 74AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F relating to the characteristic section 74AK. .

(Explanation about 75AK)
FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic portion 75AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing only needs to be executed in step 74AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 74AK of the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines a command received from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 75AKS001 to 75AKS004). If it is determined in step 75AK003 that the received command is a setting change start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a game stop state start process is executed (step 75AKS005), as in the above-described embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 75AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 75AKS007). If the setting change is not to be ended (step 75AKS007; No), unlike the above-described embodiment, after performing the setting change confirmation effect control process (step 75AKS008), the process returns to step 75AKS007. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the setting change confirmation state is controlled as the change permission state with the start of power supply by executing the setting change confirmation effect control processing in step 75AKS008. Then, control for executing the confirmation effect can be performed. When it is determined in step 75AKS007 that the setting change is to be ended (step 75AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 75AKS009), and a game stop state end process is executed (step 75AKS010).

  If it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command (step 75AKS001; Yes), or after executing the game stop state end processing in step 75AKS010, control to execute initialization notification is performed. (Step 75AKS011), and the power-on command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS003 that the received command is a setting confirmation start command (step 75AKS003; Yes), a process corresponding to the setting confirmation state is executed as in the above embodiment (steps 75AKS012 to 75AKS016). ), The power-on command processing ends. As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when the power supply is started, when the setting is changed to the setting change state, the setting change confirmation effect control processing of step 75AKS008 is executed, while the setting is changed to the setting check state. When it is controlled, the process corresponding to the setting change confirmation effect control process is not executed. Therefore, while the control for enabling the confirmation effect is performed when the setting is in the change state, the control for enabling the confirmation effect to be executed when the setting is in the check state is not performed.

  FIG. 20-52 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 75AKS008 as the setting effect confirmation effect control process. In the confirmation effect control process during setting confirmation, effect control CPU 120 first determines whether a confirmation effect has been completed (step 75AKS031). In step 75AKS031, for example, when the confirmation effect completion flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on, it may be determined that the confirmation effect has been completed. The confirmation effect completion flag may be set to the ON state when the execution of the confirmation effect is completed. If the confirmation effect has been completed in step 75AKS031 (step 75AKS031; Yes), the confirmation effect control process during setting change is ended.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS031 that the confirmation effect has not been completed (step 75AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032). At this time, if the confirmation effect is not being performed (step 75AKS032; No), it is determined whether or not an operation for starting the confirmation effect has been detected (step 75AKS033). If there is no motion detection in step 75AKS033 (step 75AKS033; No), the setting rendering confirmation effect control process ends. If it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the motion has been detected (step 75AKS033; Yes), the effect control pattern 74AKP01 is read as a setting for starting the execution of the confirmation effect (step 75AKS034), and the confirmation effect process timer is initialized. A value 74AKJ00 is set (step 75AKS035), and an initial confirmation effect process timer determination value 74AKD01 is set (step 75AKS036). As described above, in the setting effect confirmation effect presentation control process, the determination in step 75AKS033 is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, an arbitrary period such as the confirmation reception period is not provided. When the operation of pressing down the push button 31B is detected at the timing, the confirmation effect condition is satisfied, and the execution of the confirmation effect can be started.

  When it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is being performed (step 75AKS032; Yes), update control of the confirmation effect process timer is performed (step 75AKS037), and it is determined whether a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038). ). At this time, if a timeout has occurred (step 75AKS038; Yes), control for ending the confirmation effect is performed (step 75AKS039), and the confirmation effect control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timeout has not occurred (step 75AKS038; No), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the confirmation effect process timer matches the determination value (step 75AKS040). If it does not match the determination value (step 75AKS040; No), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  If it is determined in step 75AKS040 that it matches the determination value (step 75AKS040; Yes), an effect using the confirmation effect control data corresponding to the determination value is started (step 75AKS041). In addition, after setting such that the timer value is determined based on the confirmation effect process timer determination value stored next in the effect control pattern 74AKP01 (step 75AKS042), the confirmation effect control process ends.

  20 to 53 are timing diagrams and the like showing a control example of the confirmation effect regarding the characteristic portion 75AK. FIG. 20-53 (A) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, but no operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Correspondingly, the case where the setting is not controlled to the change state is shown. FIG. 20-53 (B) shows that when power supply is started by turning on the power, an operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is detected, and an operation of switching the lock switch 51 on is detected. Corresponds to the case where the state is controlled to the setting change state. FIG. 20-53 (C) shows the control content at each timing.

  When the power supply is not turned on at the timing 75AKT01 when the power is turned on and the setting is not controlled, the operation is the same as when the setting is not controlled by the feature unit 74AK, and the RAM clear notification command is received at the timing 74AKT02. Accordingly, the initialization notification is started, and accordingly, the confirmation reception period is started. When the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected at the timing 75AKT03 in the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect is started, and the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, etc. , A plurality of types of effects serving as first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT04, the confirmation effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on at the timing 75AKT11 to start the power supply, the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12, unlike the case where the setting is controlled at the timing 75AKT12. Upon receiving the start command, it is determined in step 75AKS003 of the power-on command processing that the received command is a setting change start command. As a result, after steps 75AKS005 and 75AKS006, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be terminated in step 75AKS007. If the setting change is not to be terminated at this time, a setting change confirmation effect control process is executed in step 75AKS008. You. In the confirmation effect control process during the setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, if it is determined in step 75AKS032 that the confirmation effect is not being performed, it is determined in step 75AKS033 whether a start operation has been detected. Thus, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, the confirmation effect condition can be satisfied by detecting the operation of pressing the push button 31B. For example, when the operation of pressing the push button 31B is detected at the timing 75AKT13 in the setting change state, it is determined that the start operation of the confirmation effect has been detected in Step 75AKS033 of the confirmation effect control process during setting change. Then, the control for executing the confirmation effect such as steps 75AKS034 to 75AKS042 of the setting effect confirmation effect control process is started. Thus, using the first to third confirmation effect control data 74AKD01 to 74AKD03 included in the effect control pattern 74AKP01, a plurality of types of effects to be the first to third confirmation effects are sequentially executed. Thereafter, at timing 75AKT14, the confirmation effect ends.

  After the timing 75AKT14, when the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 is received at the timing 75AKT15, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 75AK, it is determined that the setting change is ended in step 75AKS007. Thus, following steps 75AKS009 and 75AKS010, the control of step 75AKS011 is performed, and the initialization notification is started. When the initialization notification is started, as in the case of the characteristic portion 74AK, the confirmation effect control process is executed in step 74AKS018 of the effect control main process, so that the confirmation reception period is started. Just fine. Then, when the start operation of the confirmation effect is detected during the confirmation reception period, the control for executing the confirmation effect may be started again.

  As described above, the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK includes the setting change confirmation effect control process executed in step 75AKS008, and the start operation is detected in step 75AKS033 of the setting change confirmation effect control process. When it is determined that there is a confirmation effect condition, the process proceeds to step 74AKS037 and the control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. In this way, when the power supply is started by turning on the power and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state in which the change of the setting value is permitted, the control for executing the confirmation effect based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition is performed. Therefore, when the setting change state is set as the change permission state, by enabling the confirmation effect, it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and to interfere with the work of checking the state of the gaming machine. Can be prevented.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, when it is determined in step 75AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the confirmation effect control processing similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, and the confirmation is accepted. The period starts. During the confirmation reception period, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. On the other hand, in the setting effect confirmation effect control process, when it is determined that the start operation has been detected in step 75AKS033 without providing a confirmation reception period, control for executing the confirmation effect is performed. As a result, the confirmation effect can be executed at any time when the setting is being changed as the change permission condition, so in order to prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine, the confirmation effect is performed together with the setting value change. Can be performed properly.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 75AK, the control in steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011 is performed corresponding to the setting change state. After that, the confirmation effect control process similar to that of the characteristic unit 74AK is executed, so that the confirmation reception period is started. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, the control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period is performed. In order to prevent such a situation, the confirmation effect can be appropriately executed.

  The push button 31B and the push sensor 35B are configured to detect an operation such as a pressing operation by a player. For example, in the confirmation effect control process during setting change of the characteristic portion 75AK, it is determined in step 75AKS033 that the start operation has been detected, so that the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. In addition, by executing the same confirmation effect control process as that of the characteristic portion 74AK, it is determined in step 74AKS036 that the start operation has been detected, and the confirmation effect condition is satisfied. This makes it possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect when preventing the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 75AK)
Regarding the above-described characteristic portion 75AK, a gaming machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different degrees of advantage for a player is described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Further, as a gaming machine for performing control for outputting a confirmation sound, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-220833, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change and the confirmation effect compete. Therefore, there is a possibility that the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes processing).
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a setting effect confirmation control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, the confirmation effect can be executed when the change is permitted, so that it is possible to accurately check the state of the gaming machine and prevent trouble in checking the state of the gaming machine. .

In addition, as a gaming machine of means F related to the characteristic portion 75AK for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and the gaming machine described in JP 2016-220833 A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Setting control means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps Sa6 and Sa12) capable of controlling a change permission state for permitting the setting value to be changed by the setting means with the start of power supply;
Effect means (eg, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of executing effects,
After the power supply is started, the confirmation control means (for example, the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018, the confirmation effect control during setting change in step 75AKS008) capable of executing the control of the confirmation effect by the effect means based on the establishment of the confirmation effect condition. Effect control CPU 120 or the like that executes processing).
The confirmation control means,
When the control is not controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in the confirmation reception period (for example, execution of the confirmation effect control process in step 74AKS018). ),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with the establishment of the confirmation effect condition (for example, execution of a confirmation effect control process during setting change in step 75AKS008).
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, a confirmation effect can be executed when the change is permitted, so that the state of the gaming machine can be accurately confirmed and the state of the gaming machine can be confirmed. It is possible to prevent trouble in the operation of confirming. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means,
When initialization is performed without being controlled to the change permission state along with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect in accordance with establishment of the confirmation effect condition in a confirmation reception period (for example, step 74AKS033). , Running 74AKS036),
When the change is permitted, control is performed to execute the confirmation effect according to the establishment of the confirmation effect condition without providing a confirmation reception period (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The game machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the confirmation effect is appropriately executed together with the change of the set value, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 75AK,
The confirmation control means performs control for executing the confirmation effect in accordance with satisfaction of the confirmation effect condition during a confirmation acceptance period after the change permission state ends (for example, steps after execution of steps 75AKS005 to 75AKS011). 74AKS018),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being disturbed.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK,
Game detecting means (for example, a push button 31B, a push sensor 35B, etc.) capable of detecting an action by a player,
The confirmation effect condition is satisfied based on the detection of the operation by the game detecting means (for example, execution of step 75AKS033).
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the confirmation effect and prevent the operation of checking the state of the gaming machine from being disturbed.
The gaming machine of the means 2 to the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK applicable to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 75AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F relating to the characteristic portion 75AK. .

(Explanation about the characteristic part 100AK)
FIG. 21A is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect control process performed by the effect control CPU 120 regarding the characteristic unit 100AK of the present embodiment. This effect control process may be executed in place of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7 in the above embodiment.

  In the effect control process processing of the characteristic unit 100AK, the effect control CPU 120 first starts a setting suggestion effect for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect indicating the set value to the player. The processing is executed (Step 100AKS101). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a timing suggestion effect that suggests to the player the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the timing suggestion effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be achieved. In the setting suggestion effect start process of step 100AKS101, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, the timing suggestion effect is started. Next, effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for executing the setting suggestion effect (step 100AKS102). After that, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S161 to S171, similarly to the effect control process shown in FIG. 7 in the above embodiment.

  FIG. 21A is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 100AKS101 in FIG. 21A as a setting suggestion effect start process. In the setting suggestion effect start processing shown in FIG. 21A, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 shown in FIG. Is determined (step 100AKS201). The start determination timer 100AK001 is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 as shown in FIG. 21B, and measures the duration of the slump state. In the slump state, the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure is executed based on the fact that neither the first start condition nor the second start condition is satisfied, even though the player is executing the game. It does not mean that the progress of the game is stopped.

  When it is determined that the value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is 0 (Step 100AKS201; No), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed is on. Then, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202). The customer waiting demonstration flag is set to the ON state when the effect control board 12 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted from the main board 11. When it is determined that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not being executed (step 100AKS202; No), the setting suggestion effect start process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), it is determined whether or not the firing detection flag indicating that the firing of the game ball has been detected is on. Thus, it is determined whether or not the launch of the game ball has been detected (step 100AKS203). In the present embodiment, a firing detection sensor capable of detecting the firing of a game ball is provided in the hit ball firing device. When the launch of the game ball is detected by the launch detection sensor, a launch detection signal indicating that the launch of the game ball has been detected is transmitted from the hit ball launching device to the main board 11. When the main board 11 receives the firing detection signal transmitted from the hit ball firing device, the main board 11 transmits a firing detection command indicating that the firing of the game ball has been detected to the effect control board 12. The firing detection flag is set to the ON state when the effect control board 12 receives the firing detection command transmitted from the main board 11. If it is determined that the launch of the game ball has not been detected (step 100AKS203; No), the setting suggestion effect start process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the launch of the game ball has been detected (Step 100AKS203; Yes), measurement of the time by the start determination timer 100AK001 is started (Step 100AKS204). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the progress of the game is stopped based on the determination that the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (step 100AKS202; Yes), and detects the launch of the game ball. If it is determined that the player is executing a game based on the determination that the player has played (step 100AKS203; Yes), it is determined that the player is in a slump state, and a start determination timer that measures the duration of the slump state The time measurement by 100AK001 is started.

  When it is determined that the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001 is different from 0 (step 100AKS201; Yes), or after executing the process of step 100AKS204, a predetermined value is determined based on the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. It is determined whether or not the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS205). In the present embodiment, the effect start condition is that the duration of the slump state is equal to or longer than a predetermined first reference time (for example, 20 seconds). The duration of the slump state may be acquired as the timer value of the start determination timer 100AK001. The effect start condition may be such that the number of shooting balls in the slump state is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number (for example, 50). In the present embodiment, the main board 11 fires a ball indicating the number of fired balls (the number of times the fired game balls are detected) based on a signal from the outlet switch 70 for detecting the fired game balls. A number command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. If the effect start condition is a condition relating to the number of fired balls, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of fired balls in the slump state from the main board 11 in a state in which time measurement by the start determination timer 100AK001 is being executed. What is necessary is just to detect based on a ball number command. Note that the number of shot balls may be detected based on a ball lending signal supplied from the ball lending machine and indicating the number of gaming balls lent by the ball lending machine. In this case, the ball lending signal may be supplied from the ball lending machine to the effect control board 12 via the main board 11, or may be directly supplied from the ball lending machine to the effect control board 12.

  When it is determined that the effect start condition is satisfied (Step 100AKS205; Yes), the setting for executing the setting suggestive effect such as determination of the effect pattern is performed (Step 100AKS206).

  In the present embodiment, three effects of a first-stage effect, a second-stage effect, and a third-stage effect are executed in stages as setting suggestion effects. To be more specific, in the present embodiment, the timing suggestion effect is an effect mode suggesting a predetermined first condition, an effect mode suggesting a predetermined second condition, and an effect mode suggesting a predetermined third condition. It is possible to execute it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute timing suggestion effects in various effect modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The first stage effect is executed when the first condition is satisfied after the first suggestion effect, which is a timing suggestion effect of an effect mode suggesting the first condition, is performed. The second stage effect is performed when the second condition is satisfied. The second stage effect, which is a timing suggestion effect of the suggestion effect mode, is executed when the second condition is satisfied after the second suggestion effect is executed, and the third stage effect is a timing effect effect of the effect condition suggesting the third condition. It is executed when the third condition is satisfied after the third suggestion effect is executed. The third condition is a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than the second condition (more time is required to be satisfied), and the second condition is a condition that is more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition. In the present embodiment, the first condition is that the number of variable displays of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number (for example, 20 times). In the present embodiment, the second condition is that a period in which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or longer than a predetermined second reference time (for example, 15 minutes). The period according to the second condition elapses only while the game is being executed. In the present embodiment, the third condition is that the number of shot balls after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number (for example, 2000). In this way, by performing the setting suggestion effect stepwise, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, to stimulate the player's willingness to continue the game, and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be. Note that the setting suggestion effect is not limited to being executed in three stages, and an effect of two stages or less may be executed as a setting suggestion effect, or an effect of four or more stages may be executed as a setting suggestion effect. Also, the number of effects to be performed as the setting suggestion effect may be determined by random number drawing or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are a condition related to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, a condition related to the period, and the number of fired balls, respectively. Has been described as having been set, but this is only an example. At least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure, or the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition. At least two or more of the third conditions may be conditions relating to a period, and at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of fired balls. . That is, all of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure (for example, the first condition may be an effect start condition). Is that the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the establishment of the first special figure or the second special figure is 20 or more, and the second condition is the first special figure or the second special figure after the production start condition is satisfied. The number of times of variable display of the figure is 40 or more, and the third condition is that the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied is 60 or more. ), All of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the period, or all of the first, second, and third conditions may be the number of shot balls. Such conditions may be satisfied. In the present embodiment, a description will be given assuming that a condition (second condition) relating to a period that elapses only during the execution of the game is set as one of the conditions under which the setting suggestion effect is executed. As the condition under which the setting suggestion effect is executed, a condition relating to a period that elapses regardless of whether the game is executed may be set. In this case, the period that elapses regardless of whether the game is being executed may be acquired based on time information output by, for example, a real-time clock (RTC) 126.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes any of the effects (setting suggestion effects) A to E shown in FIG. 21-3 (a) as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. The effect A is an effect in which an image representing a message “Is the setting good?” Is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect B is an effect in which an image representing a message “Setting is not bad!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect C is an effect in which an image representing a message “Setting is not bad!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect D is an effect in which an image representing a message “Lucky today!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. The effect E is an effect in which an image representing a message “This is the best setting!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. The expectation of the effect E is higher than the expectation of the effect D, the expectation of the effect D is higher than the expectation of the effect C, the expectation of the effect C is higher than the expectation of the effect B, and the expectation of the effect B Is higher than the expectation of production A. The degree of expectation of an effect is a rate at which the effect is executed when the most advantageous set value 1 is set. That is, the higher the degree of expectation of the effect, the lower the rate at which the effect is executed when the most disadvantageous setting value 3 is set.

  In the present embodiment, a description will be given assuming that any one of the effects A to E shown in FIG. 21-3 (a) is executed as the setting suggestion effect. ) Is not limited to each production. For example, when the setting value includes four or more steps (for example, when the setting value includes six steps from 1 to 6), as the setting suggestion effect, an effect indicating that the setting value is an even number (for example, “even number setting? ) On the image display device 5). Alternatively, as the setting suggestion effect, an effect indicating that the set value is an odd number (for example, an effect of displaying an image indicating a message of “odd number setting?” On the image display device 5), and the most advantageous setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous. (For example, an effect of displaying an image indicating a message “Settings cannot be determined” on the image display device 5) suggesting that the setting value 2 is different from the setting value 3 and a specific setting value. Performing an effect indicating that the setting has been made (for example, an effect of displaying an image representing a message such as “Setting 1 fixed!”, “Setting 2 fixed!”, “Setting 3 fixed!” Etc. on the image display device 5) and the like May be. Alternatively, as a setting suggestion effect, an effect indicating that a setting value different from the setting value set yesterday is set (for example, an image representing a message “Is the setting different from yesterday?” Is displayed on the image display device 5). May be executed. This effect may be executed when it is determined that the setting change end command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Alternatively, as a setting suggesting effect, an effect indicating that the setting value is set to be more advantageous than the setting value set yesterday (for example, an image representing a message “is setting better than yesterday?” Is displayed on the image display device 5). On the image display device 5, or an effect indicating that the setting value is set to be less favorable than the setting value set yesterday (for example, an image representing a message “Is the setting worse than yesterday?” May be executed. In this case, the effect control board 12 includes a non-volatile storage device such as a flash memory, and the storage device non-volatilely stores data indicating yesterday's set value even when the RAM clear processing is executed. And so on, and the effect may be executed based on this data.

  In the present embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect, it is assumed that effects A to E which display various images on the image display device 5 as illustrated in FIG. Is not limited to this, and it is possible to indicate a set value set by displaying an image, outputting a sound, turning on a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operating an accessory, or a combination thereof. I just need.

  In the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 determines any one of the patterns 1 to X shown in FIG. 21-3 (b) as the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect, thereby producing the first stage effect and the second stage effect. It is determined which of the effects A to E is to be executed as the effect and the third stage effect. As shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), in pattern 1 to pattern 3, any one of the effects A to E is set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. In this embodiment, the effect E with the highest expectation is executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. In each of the patterns shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), the effect having a higher degree of expectation than the effect set as the first-stage effect is set as the second-stage effect, and is set as the second-stage effect. An effect with a higher degree of expectation than a certain effect is set as the third stage effect. For this reason, as the setting suggestion effect progresses step by step, the degree of expectation of the effect to be executed increases, and the interest in the game can be improved. The operating rate of the gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  In pattern 1 to pattern X shown in FIG. 21-3 (b), although different effects are set as the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect, respectively, the effect of the setting suggestive effect is provided. The pattern is not limited to this, and at least two or more of the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect, and the third-stage effect may be the same effect. In the present embodiment, the effect E having the highest expectation is described as being executed only when the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. However, when the pattern other than the pattern X is determined as the effect pattern. The effect E may be configured to be executable.

  In the process of step 100AKS206, effect control CPU 120 determines an effect pattern at the rate shown in FIG. 21C according to the set value. The set value that has been set may be obtained based on the EXT data corresponding to the set value newly set by the change in the setting change end command received from the main board 11. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21C, the pattern X is determined as an effect pattern only when the most advantageous set value 1 is set.

  In this embodiment, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are described as being determined collectively by executing the process of step 100AKS206 at the start of the setting suggestive effect. However, the method of determining the effect mode is not limited to this, and the effect modes of the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect, and the third-stage effect may be determined.

  After executing the process of step 100AKS206, the effect control CPU 120 determines, as a timing suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect indicating a timing at which the first stage effect is executed in response to the first condition being satisfied, and a second suggestion effect. A second suggestion effect indicating the timing at which the second stage effect is executed in response to the condition being satisfied, and a timing suggesting the third stage effect to be executed in response to the third condition being satisfied. The third suggestion effect is started (step 100AKS207). When the timing suggestion effect is started in the process of step 100AKS207, the timing suggestion effect execution flag indicating that the timing suggestion effect is being executed is set to the ON state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first special effect or the second special effect executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the first condition as the first suggestive effect. An effect of displaying an image indicating the number of times of variable display on the image display device 5 is started. The display of the number of times of the variable display is updated as the game progresses. The effect control CPU 120 displays, on the image display device 5, an image indicating a period in which the game is executed until the timing at which the second stage effect is executed in response to the establishment of the second condition, as the second suggestive effect. Start the production to be displayed. The display of this period is updated in accordance with the progress of the game only while the game is being executed. The effect display control CPU 120 displays, on the image display device 5, an image indicating the number of shot balls until the timing when the third stage effect is executed in response to the third condition being satisfied, as the third suggestive effect. Start the production.

  The first suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the first stage effect starts. The second suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the second stage effect starts. The third suggestion effect started in the process of step 100AKS207 ends when the third stage effect starts. That is, during the period from the execution of the process of step 100AKS207 to the start of the first stage effect, the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are executed in parallel, and the first stage effect is performed. Is started and the second stage effect is started, the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are executed in parallel.

  Note that, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. Correspondingly, a setting suggestion effect is executed for at least two or more of the first suggestion effect corresponding to the first condition, the second suggestion effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestion effect corresponding to the third condition. The effect may indicate the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed until a certain timing. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the period, and in response to this, the first suggestion corresponding to the first condition is provided. Even if at least two or more of the effect, the second suggestive effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestive effect corresponding to the third condition are effects indicating a period until a timing at which the setting suggestive effect is executed, Good. Further, as described above, at least two or more of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition may be conditions relating to the number of fired balls, and correspondingly, the first condition corresponding to the first condition may be used. At least two or more of the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect corresponding to the second condition, and the third suggestion effect corresponding to the third condition, an effect indicating the number of launch balls until the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. It may be.

  Note that, as described above, a condition relating to a period that elapses regardless of whether or not the game is executed may be set as a condition under which the setting suggestion effect is executed. As an alternative, a display of a period that elapses regardless of whether or not the game is executed may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as the timing suggestion effect, an effect of displaying various images on the image display device 5 will be described. However, the effect mode of the timing suggestion effect is not limited to this. , Lighting of a lamp (for example, a 7-segment LED), operation of an accessory, or a combination thereof may indicate the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect start condition is satisfied based on the slump state, the timing suggestion effect is started. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced due to the slump state, to stimulate the player's willingness to continue the game, and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, a description will be given assuming that the timing suggestion effect is started when the effect start condition is satisfied based on the slump state, but the effect start condition is not limited to this. For example, when a random number lottery is won after the game is started, the timing suggestion effect may be started by determining that the effect start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the game has been started may be determined, for example, by determining whether or not a firing detection command has been received. In this case, after a predetermined timing after the game is started (for example, when the number of fired balls reaches 750 or more), the random number lottery is won at a higher rate than before the predetermined timing. The determination values may be distributed so as to perform the determination. In this case, an image indicating the number of shot balls may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Alternatively, when a predetermined timing in a customer waiting state in which a game is not executed (for example, a timing in which five minutes or more have elapsed without receiving a firing detection command after receiving a customer waiting demo designation command), an effect is produced. The timing suggestion effect may be started by determining that the start condition is satisfied. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the operation rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by attracting the interest of a player who has not yet started the game and stimulating the desire to start the game.

  Alternatively, the timing suggestion effect may be started at a predetermined timing during the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure. In this case, if the predetermined timing has arrived after the reach effect has started, the timing suggestion effect is not executed in order to prevent the player from confusing the timing suggestion effect as a preview effect and confusing. Is preferred. Further, even when the predetermined timing has arrived after the pseudo continuous production has started, it is preferable not to execute the timing suggestion production in order to prevent the production from being complicated.

  After starting the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS207, the effect control CPU 120 starts measuring time with the suggestion effect timer 100AK002 shown in FIG. 21B (step 100AKS208). The suggestion effect timer 100AK002 is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and measures the time elapsed since the start of the timing suggestion effect. The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS209). Effect control CPU 120 starts measuring the time by condition determination timer 100AK003 shown in FIG. 21B (step 100AKS210). As shown in FIG. 21B, the condition determination timer 100AK003 is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and measures a period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied. The timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 is updated only while the game is being executed. Specifically, the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 may be updated, for example, only until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the shot game ball is detected by the outlet switch 70. . The effect control CPU 120 starts counting the number of game balls fired after the effect start condition is satisfied (step 100AKS211).

  In the process of step 100AKS205, when it is determined that the production start condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS205; No), it is determined whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Is determined (Step 100AKS212). If it is determined that the first change start command or the second change start command has not been received (step 100AKS212; No), the setting suggestion effect start process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes), the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset (step 100AKS213), and the setting suggestion effect start process ends. I do. That is, based on the determination that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received (step 100AKS212; Yes), it is determined that the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is being executed. In this case, it is determined that the slump state has ended, and the start determination timer 100AK001 that measures the duration of the slump state is reset. When the start determination timer 100AK001 is reset in the process of step 100AKS213, the customer waiting demonstration flag and the launch detection flag are cleared.

  FIG. 21-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step 100AKS102 of FIG. 21-1 as the setting suggestion effect execution process. In the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 21-4, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the timing suggestion effect execution flag is ON, thereby determining whether the timing suggestion effect is being executed. Is determined (step 100AKS301). If it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is not being executed (step 100AKS301; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing suggestion effect is being executed (step 100AKS301; Yes), it is determined whether the first condition satisfaction flag indicating that the first condition has been satisfied is on. By doing so, it is determined whether the first condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS302). If it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS302; No), it is determined whether the first condition is satisfied (variable of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied). It is determined whether or not the number of display times is equal to or more than the reference number (step 100AKS303). When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied (Step 100AKS303; Yes), the effect set as the first stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of Step 100AKS206 among the effects A to E is performed. The process starts (step 100AKS304), and the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied in the process of step 100AKS303, the first condition satisfaction flag is set to the ON state. When the first stage effect is started in the process of step 100AKS304, the first suggestion effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first condition is not satisfied (Step 100AKS303; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS305). If it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS305; No), it is determined whether a predetermined end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306). In the present embodiment, the end condition is that a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received after the timing suggestion effect is started, and thereafter, the launch of the game ball is not detected (the launch detection command is received from the main board 11). No) a predetermined third reference time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses. This termination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed. The termination condition is not limited to this, and may be any condition that can determine that the game is not being executed. The elapsed time after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command may be acquired based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002.

  When it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS306; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS306; Yes), or if it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS305; Yes), the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect Without executing the stage effect, the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are ended (step 100AKS307), and the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. At the time of ending the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS307, the customer waiting demonstration flag, the launch detection flag, and the timing suggestion effect execution flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion effect timer 100AK002, and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset. At the same time, the count of the number of times of variable display started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of shot spheres started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  When it is determined that the first condition has been satisfied in the process of step 100AKS302 (step 100AKS302; Yes), it is determined whether the second condition satisfaction flag indicating that the second condition has been satisfied is on. Is determined, it is determined whether or not the second condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS308). If it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS308; No), it is determined whether or not the second condition is satisfied based on the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003 (game after the effect start condition is satisfied) Is determined as to whether or not the period during which has been executed is equal to or longer than the second reference time (step 100AKS310). The period during which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied may be obtained as the timer value of the condition determination timer 100AK003. When it is determined that the second condition is satisfied (Step 100AKS310; Yes), the effect set as the second stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the process of Step 100AKS206 among the effects A to E is performed. The process starts (step 100AKS309), and the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. If it is determined in step 100AKS310 that the second condition is satisfied (step 100AKS310; Yes), the second condition satisfaction flag is set to the ON state. When the second stage effect is started in the process of step 100AKS309, the second suggestion effect is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS310; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS311). If it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS311; No), it is determined whether or not the end condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS312). If it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS312; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (step 100AKS312; Yes) or when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (step 100AKS311; Yes), the second stage effect and the third stage effect are executed. Without this, the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are ended (step 100AKS313), and the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. In addition, when ending the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS313, and ending the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS313, the first stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS304 is ended. Further, the customer waiting demonstration flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion effect execution flag, and the first condition satisfaction flag are cleared, the start determination timer 100AK001, the suggestion effect timer 100AK002, and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and the processing in step 100AKS209 is performed. The count of the number of times of the variable display that has been started and the count of the number of shot balls that have been started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  When it is determined that the second condition has been satisfied in the process of step 100AKS308 (step 100AKS308; Yes), it is determined whether the third condition has been satisfied (the number of shot balls after the production start condition has been satisfied is a reference). (Step 100AKS314). When it is determined that the third condition is satisfied (Step 100AKS314; Yes), the effect set as the third stage effect in the effect pattern determined by the processing of Step 100AKS206 among the effects A to E ( The third stage effect) is started (step 100AKS315). The third stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS315 is ended after being executed for a predetermined effect time. The execution time of the third stage effect may be obtained based on the timer value of the suggestion effect timer 100AK002. When ending the third stage effect, the first stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS304 and the second stage effect started in the process of step 100AKS309 are ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the third condition is not satisfied (Step 100AKS314; No), it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the variable display result notification command received from the main board 11. (Step 100AKS316). If it is determined that no big hit has occurred (step 100AKS316; No), it is determined whether or not the end condition has been satisfied (step 100AKS317). When it is determined that the end condition is not satisfied (step 100AKS317; No), the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied (Step 100AKS317; Yes), when it is determined that a big hit has occurred (Step 100AKS316; Yes), or when the third stage effect is started in the processing of Step 100AKS315. Then, the third suggestion effect is ended (step 100AKS318), and the setting suggestion effect execution process ends. That is, when it is determined that the end condition is satisfied in the processing of step 100AKS317, and when it is determined that the big hit has occurred in the processing of step 100AKS316, the setting suggestion effect execution process is performed without executing the third stage effect. To end. When ending the timing suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS318, the customer waiting demonstration flag, the launch detection flag, the timing suggestion effect execution flag, the first condition satisfaction flag, and the second condition satisfaction flag are cleared, and the start determination timer 100AK001 In addition, the suggestion effect timer 100AK002 and the condition determination timer 100AK003 are reset, and the count of the number of times of variable display started in the process of step 100AKS209 and the count of the number of shot balls started in the process of step 100AKS211 are reset.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, after the timing suggestion effect is started, if it is determined in step 100AKS306, 100AKS312, or 100AKS317 that the end condition has been satisfied based on the fact that the game has not been executed. Ends the timing suggestion effect without executing an effect that has not been executed among the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. According to this configuration, when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the termination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are selected. The timing suggestion effect is ended without executing the effect that has not been executed yet. For this reason, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect performed based on the game performed by the one player. Can be prevented, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.

  In addition, after the production start condition is satisfied, the timing suggestion production is performed when the setting suggestion production is performed at a timing when the elapsed period is equal to or longer than a predetermined time regardless of whether the game is executed. Although the customer waiting demo designation command is received after the start, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect arrives before the end condition is satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the termination condition has been described as being satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed. However, the termination condition may be satisfied based on an operation by the player. For example, after the timing suggestion effect is started, the operation means for receiving (detecting) the operation of the player, such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, and the direction key, is determined by the player. Is received, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied, and the timing suggestion effect is terminated without executing a not-yet-executed effect among the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect, and the third-stage effect. I do. Specifically, when the push button 31B and the push sensor 35B detect a pressing operation by the player, a reception screen for receiving selection by the player as to whether or not to end the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In the displayed state, when the player instructs the end of the setting suggestion effect using the stick controller 31A, the controller sensor unit 35A, or the direction key, the direction key may be determined to be satisfied. According to this configuration, when a predetermined operation is performed when the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the end condition is satisfied and the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect are still executed. The timing suggestion effect is ended without executing the effect not performed. For this reason, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player recognizes the set value by the setting suggestion effect performed based on the game performed by the one player. Can be prevented, and the fairness of the game can be maintained. Note that the termination condition may be established based on at least one of a state in which the game is not executed and an operation by the player.

  In the present embodiment, after the timing suggestion effect is started, if it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the process of step 100AKS305, 100AKS311 or 100AKS317, the timing suggestion effect is described as being terminated. Even when it is determined that a big hit has occurred, the timing suggestion effect may not be ended.

  Next, an example of an effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect and the timing suggestion effect in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 21-5 illustrates an example of the effect operation in the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the pattern X illustrated in FIG. 21-3 (b). FIG. 21-5 (A) shows a state in which, in the slump state, a demonstration screen corresponding to the stoppage of the game in the customer waiting state is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed). ing.

  When the production start condition is satisfied (when the duration of the slump state is equal to or longer than the first reference time), as shown in FIG. 21-5 (B), the first suggested production, the second suggested production, The suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are started. Specifically, as the first suggestive effect, the number of times the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed by the timing when the first-stage effect is performed is suggested. The effect of displaying the first message image AK1 representing the message on the image display device 5 is started. Here, "small presentation" in the message indicates execution of the first stage effect. Further, as a second suggestion effect, a second message image AK2 representing a message “Information is announced in 15:00 minutes later!” Indicating a period in which the game is executed until the timing at which the second stage effect is executed is displayed as an image. The effect displayed on the display device 5 is started. Here, "middle announcement" in the message indicates execution of the second stage effect. Further, as the third suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a third message image AK3 indicating a message "Large announcement with 2,000 more shots!" Indicating the number of shot balls until the timing when the third stage effect is executed. The effect to be displayed is started. After the timing suggestion effect is started, the display of the number of variable displays in the first message image AK1, the display of the period during which the game is being executed in the second message image AK2, and the launch sphere in the third message image AK3 The display of the numbers is updated as the game progresses, as shown in FIGS. 21-5 (B) to 21-5 (E). FIGS. 21-5 (B) and 21-5 (C) show a state where the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect are being executed during the same period.

  Thereafter, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (C), each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5 is displayed. , 5C and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

  When the first condition is satisfied (when the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure after the effect start condition is satisfied becomes equal to or more than the reference number), the processing proceeds to FIG. 21-5 (D). As shown, the display of the first message image AK1 as the first suggestion effect is terminated, and the fourth message image AK4 representing the message “Is the setting not bad?” Is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first stage effect. The effect to be displayed (effect A shown in FIG. 21-3 (a)) is started. FIG. 21D illustrates a state in which the second suggestion effect and the third suggestion effect are being executed during the same period.

  When the second condition is satisfied (when the period in which the game is executed after the effect start condition is satisfied is equal to or longer than the second reference time), as shown in FIG. The display of the second message image AK2 as the suggestion effect is ended, and the fifth message image AK5 representing the message “Setting is not bad!” Is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second stage effect (FIG. 21). An effect B) shown in -3 (a) is started. FIG. 21E illustrates a state in which the first stage effect and the second stage effect are being executed during the same period.

  When the third condition is satisfied (when the number of fired balls after the production start condition is satisfied is equal to or larger than the reference number), as shown in FIG. The display of the third message image AK3 is ended, and as a third stage effect, an effect of displaying the sixth message image AK6 representing the message “This is the best setting!” On the image display device 5 (FIG. 21-3 (a)). The effect X) shown in FIG. FIG. 21F illustrates a state in which the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect, and the third-stage effect are executed during the same period. After the third stage effect has been executed for a predetermined effect time, as shown in FIG. 21-5 (G), display of the fourth message image AK4 as the first stage effect, and fifth message as the second stage effect The setting suggestion effect ends when both the display of the image AK5 and the display of the sixth message image AK6 as the third stage effect end.

  Note that an effect other than the timing suggestion effect may be executed as the effect indicating the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, as an effect indicating the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed before the setting suggestion effect is executed, even if the explanation effect which explains (sugges) the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed to the player is performed. Good. Specifically, at the end of the special map game in which the display result is “big hit”, an effect of displaying a character image indicating the set value on the image display device 5 is executed as a setting suggestion effect, and the explanation effect is provided. An effect that explains to the player that the execution timing of the setting suggestive effect is the end of the special figure game in which the display result is "big hit" (for example, "Pay attention to the character image displayed at the end of the big hit!"). The effect of displaying an image representing the message on the image display device 5) may be executed. The explanation effect may be executed at any timing before the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic part 100AK)
Conventionally, with respect to the above-described characteristic portion 100AK, conventionally, the setting value in a plurality of stages is changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to a value corresponding to the changed setting value, and the giraffe and the elephant are changed according to the setting values before and after the change. For example, there is a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as an example of a gaming machine that displays an image of a character of a lion and suggests a set value before and after a change. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is desired to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 100AK for providing a gaming machine with an improved game interest,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, and 100AKS315) for executing a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value;
A special effect execution means (for example, in step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an explanation effect, etc.) that suggests a timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution device before the specific effect is executed. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing), and
Comprising,
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

In addition, as a gaming machine of means F according to the characteristic portion 100AK that solves the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, and 100AKS315) for executing a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value;
A special effect execution means (for example, in step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an explanation effect, etc.) that suggests a timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution device before the specific effect is executed. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing), and
With
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

The specific effect indicating the set value that has been set may be executed in the specific display in which the display is started in response to the start of the variable display and the display is ended in response to the end of the variable display. For example, the specific display mode may be changed at a different execution ratio according to the set value that is set. Further, the change of the specific display mode may be executed at different execution ratios according to the expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state and the set value. For example, if the mode of the specific display is made to easily change when the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is high and when the setting value is set to a value advantageous to the player, the mode of the specific display may change. Nevertheless, even if it is not controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to give the player an image that is likely to be set to a setting value advantageous to the player, so that discouragement of the player can be reduced Thus, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation.
In addition, a special effect indicating the timing at which the specific effect is executed may be executed in the specific display in which the display is started in response to the start of the variable display and the display is ended in response to the end of the variable display. For example, in the active display movement effect shown in FIG. 22-4, the variable display period suggested by moving the sphere display 129IW002b to the start position at the start of the variable display and to the end position at the end of the variable display. A mark (mark) is displayed at a predetermined position (a position between the start position and the end position) in, and at the timing when the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the mark (mark), a specific effect indicating the set value is suggested. May be executed. Alternatively, the specific effect may be executed at a timing when the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the end position without displaying the mark (mark).

As a gaming machine of the means 2 according to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a timing suggestive effect, an effect mode suggesting a first condition, and an effect mode suggesting a second condition). And an effect mode suggesting the third condition).
The gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 100AK may be a feature.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects in various effect modes, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 according to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means executes, as the special effect, an effect indicating a period up to a timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, the second stage effect is performed as a second suggestive effect). Start a production that suggests a period of time before it is executed)
It may be a gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 according to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means executes, as the special effect, an effect indicating the number of times of the variable display to be performed before the timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, as the first suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS206). , An effect indicating the number of times of variable display to be executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed is started),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means executes the special effect at a higher rate after the predetermined timing after the game is started than before the predetermined timing (for example, at a predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the ratio determined to execute the timing suggestive effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 according to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means can execute, as the special effect, at least a first special effect indicating a first condition and a second special effect indicating a second condition (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). A first suggestive effect suggesting the first condition, a second suggestive effect suggesting the second condition, and a third suggestive effect suggesting the third condition),
The specific effect execution means,
The specific effect can be executed in response to the first condition being satisfied after the first special effect is executed (for example, the process of step 100 AKS304 is executed),
The specific effect can be executed in response to the second condition being satisfied after the second special effect is executed (for example, the process of step 100AKS309 is executed),
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestion effect is executed during the period in which the first suggestion effect is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect step by step, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK,
The special effect execution means starts the special effect in response to a specific condition (eg, an effect start condition) being established in a state where the variable display is not executed (eg, the effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the process of step 100 AKS207 is executed.)
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an end condition) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect ( For example, when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied in the processing of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, and 100AKS317, the processing of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, and 100AKS318 is executed.)
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 7 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the value based on the specific effect executed based on the game played by the one player. Can be prevented from being recognized, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.

As a gaming machine of the means 9 according to the characteristic portion 100AK,
Operating means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, a direction key, etc.) for receiving an operation by the player;
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined operation by the player is received by the operating means, the special effect is terminated without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestive effect is started). , The stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, the direction instruction key, and the like, when a predetermined operation by the player is received, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not yet been executed)),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 8 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the value based on the specific effect executed based on the game played by the one player. Can be prevented from being recognized, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.
In addition, the gaming machines of the means 2 to 9 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK applicable to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 100AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F relating to the characteristic portion 100AK. .

(Explanation of the means relating to the characteristic portion 101AK)
Conventionally, regarding the characteristic portion 101AK, the setting values of a plurality of stages are conventionally changed based on the operation, the jackpot probability is set to a value corresponding to the changed setting value, and a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion are set according to the set values before and after the change. For example, there is a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as an example of a gaming machine that displays any one of the character images to indicate the set values before and after the change. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is desired to improve the interest of the game. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 101AK for providing a gaming machine with an improved game interest,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, and 100AKS315) for executing a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value;
A special effect execution means (for example, in step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an explanation effect, etc.) that suggests a timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution device before the specific effect is executed. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing), and
With
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a timing suggestive effect, an effect mode suggesting a first condition, and an effect mode suggesting a second condition). And an effect mode suggesting the third condition).
It may be a gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, to execute the special effect in various effect modes, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, as a game machine of means F relating to the characteristic portion 101AK for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the setting change process in step Sa13) capable of setting any one of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a CPU 103 for executing a special symbol process in step S25) capable of proceeding with a game such that the advantage for the player is different based on the set value;
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing of steps 100AKS304, 100AKS309, and 100AKS315) for executing a specific effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value;
A special effect execution means (for example, in step 100AKS206) for executing a special effect (for example, a timing suggestion effect, an explanation effect, etc.) that suggests a timing at which the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution device before the specific effect is executed. Effect control CPU 120 for executing the processing), and
With
The special effect execution means can execute the special effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes (for example, a timing suggestive effect, an effect mode suggesting a first condition, and an effect mode suggesting a second condition). And an effect mode suggesting the third condition).
further,
A specific display (for example, a sphere in an active display or an active display movement effect) in which the display starts in response to the start of a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol) and ends in response to the end of the variable display. Display 129IW002b) (specific display execution means).
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period (for example, the active display movement effect causes the sphere display 129IW002b to be located at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display. (See FIG. 22-4.)
When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, the sphere display 129IW002b is changed to the sphere display 129IW002b). An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving (see FIG. 22-5).
According to this means F, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, and to perform the special effect in various effect modes. By executing the above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-93653, the effect of the effect can be enhanced in a gaming machine in which the effect content is displayed in advance, such as a transition of the effect content shown in a flowchart.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
The special effect execution means executes, as the special effect, an effect indicating a period up to a timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206, the second stage effect is performed as a second suggestive effect). Start a production that suggests a period of time before it is executed)
A gaming machine of the means 1 according to the characteristic portion 101AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
The special effect execution means executes, as the special effect, an effect indicating the number of times of the variable display to be performed before the timing at which the specific effect is executed (for example, as the first suggestion effect in the process of step 100AKS206). , An effect indicating the number of times of variable display to be executed by the timing when the first stage effect is executed is started),
The gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 according to the characteristic portion 101AK may be used.
According to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the specific effect is executed based on the special effect, thereby improving the interest of the game and improving the operation rate of the gaming machine. it can.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
The special effect execution means executes the special effect at a higher rate after the predetermined timing after the game is started than before the predetermined timing (for example, at a predetermined timing after the game is started). After that, the ratio determined to execute the timing suggestive effect is higher than before the predetermined timing),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK.
According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
The special effect execution means can execute, as the special effect, at least a first special effect indicating a first condition and a second special effect indicating a second condition (for example, in the process of step 100AKS206). A first suggestive effect suggesting the first condition, a second suggestive effect suggesting the second condition, and a third suggestive effect suggesting the third condition),
The specific effect execution means,
The specific effect can be executed in response to the first condition being satisfied after the first special effect is executed (for example, the process of step 100 AKS304 is executed),
The specific effect can be executed in response to the second condition being satisfied after the second special effect is executed (for example, the process of step 100AKS309 is executed),
The first special effect and the second special effect can be executed during the same period (for example, the second suggestion effect is executed during the period in which the first suggestion effect is executed),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect step by step, improve the interest of the game, and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

As a gaming machine of the means 6 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
The special effect execution means starts the special effect in response to a specific condition (eg, an effect start condition) being established in a state where the variable display is not executed (eg, the effect start condition in the process of step 100AKS205). If it is determined that the condition has been satisfied, the process of step 100 AKS207 is executed.)
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 5 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK.
According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

As a gaming machine of the means 7 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined condition (for example, an end condition) is satisfied based on the fact that the game is not executed, the special effect is ended without executing the specific effect ( For example, when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied in the processing of steps 100AKS306, 100AKS312, and 100AKS317, the processing of steps 100AKS307, 100AKS313, and 100AKS318 is executed.)
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 6 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the value based on the specific effect executed based on the game played by the one player. Can be prevented from being recognized, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.

As a gaming machine of the means 8 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK,
Operating means (for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, a direction key, etc.) for receiving an operation by the player;
After the special effect is started, if a predetermined operation by the player is received by the operating means, the special effect is terminated without executing the specific effect (for example, after the timing suggestive effect is started). , The stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, the direction instruction key, and the like, when a predetermined operation by the player is received, the first stage effect, the second stage effect, and the third stage effect. End the timing suggestion effect without executing the effect that has not yet been executed)),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 7 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK.
According to such a configuration, after one player finishes the game and leaves the seat, the other player sets the value based on the specific effect executed based on the game played by the one player. Can be prevented from being recognized, and the fairness of the game can be maintained.
Note that the gaming machines of the means 2 to 8 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK which can be applied to the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 101AK can also be applied to the gaming machine of the means F relating to the characteristic portion 101AK. .

(Explanation of the means common to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK)
As a gaming machine of the means A relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization of the gaming machine;
Setting confirmation control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state based on the detection of the operation by the setting detection means with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 103 executing steps AKS001 and AKS002);
A change permission control means capable of controlling to the change permission state based on the detection of the operation by the initialization detection means upon the start of power supply (for example, the CPU 103 executing steps Sa6 and Sa13);
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the setting confirmation state and the change permission state, and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means B relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK,
Setting detecting means (for example, a lock switch 51 or the like) capable of detecting an operation related to setting;
Initialization detecting means (for example, a clear switch AK001) capable of detecting an operation related to initialization;
When the operation is not detected by the setting detecting means and the operation is detected by the initialization detecting means with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification is executed at the same time as the power supply is started, while the power supply is started. Accordingly, when an operation is detected by the setting detection unit, the initialization notification unit executes the initialization notification after the operation is no longer detected (for example, for an effect control unit that executes a power-on command process in step AKS012). CPU 120).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the initialization notification and to appropriately set the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means C relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK,
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 29) capable of displaying information relating to a game value given based on a game medium entering a predetermined area;
The information display means can display a set value set by the setting means (for example, a display by the first display unit 29A).
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the setting values without separately providing a configuration for displaying the setting values.

As a gaming machine of the means D relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK,
Effect detection means (for example, an output amount changeover switch 71AK001 or the like) capable of detecting an operation relating to the output amount of the effect;
A display control unit (for example, an effect control CPU 120 executing step AKS026) for displaying a display relating to the set value by the setting unit in preference to a display relating to the output amount of the effect;
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, the display relating to the set value is appropriately performed, and it is possible to prevent the trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means E relating to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK,
Effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on information from the game control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing a command analysis process of AKS015);
The effect control means, when in the change permission state, information restriction means for restricting control based on information different from notification information for notifying the end of the change permission state (for example, effect control CPU 120 executing AKS027 or the like) ) And
A gaming machine according to the characteristic portions 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be used.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem and to appropriately set the set value.

(Explanation related to association of features)
Each configuration related to the feature units 71AK to 75AK, 100AK, and 101AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other feature units. The features combined in this way, or individual features not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of the configurations for other features. For example, regarding the characteristic unit 71AK, the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the start-time output switching process in step 71AKS013 of the effect control main process, and the short initial operation in step 72AK007 of the power-on command process regarding the characteristic unit 72AK. With respect to the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 that performs the control to be executed, and regarding the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined that the setting change is completed in step 73AKS007 of the power-on command processing. Concerning the configuration of the CPU 120 and the characteristic portion 74AK, in the step 74AKS018 of the production control main process, the configuration of the production control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation production control process, and the characteristic portion 75AK, in step 75AKS008 of the power-on command processing Regarding the configuration of the effect control CPU 120 for executing the confirmation effect control process during the constant change, the setting suggestion effect start process is executed in step 100AKS101 of the effect control process process for the characteristic units 100AK and 101AK, and the setting suggestion effect execution is executed in step 100AKS102. The configuration for executing the processing may be a part or all of the configuration appropriately combined.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  In addition, all or some of the configurations described in the above-described embodiments and the modifications and the configurations described in the embodiments and the modifications described below may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting, a title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for informing a title corresponding to the suggestion effect, The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9 (D) and (F)), and furthermore, a variable display. The display starts at the start of the display and ends at the end of the variable display. 129IW002b), and the specific display execution means can display the specific display in a manner that can suggest a variable display period (for example, the spherical display 129IW002b by the active display movement effect). Is indicated at the start position at the start of the variable display and at the end position at the end of the variable display (see FIG. 22-4). Is displayed, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the spherical display 129IW002b, An active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed, as shown in FIG. ) Game machine and the like.

  According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, as an example of a gaming machine that can enhance the effect, a variable display (for example, a variable display of a special symbol or a decoration symbol) is performed, and the gaming machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player. It is a gaming machine that is capable of displaying a specific display (for example, display of an active display or a sphere display 129IW002b in an active display movement effect) in which the display is started in response to the start of the variable display and the display ends in response to the end of the variable display. ), The specific display execution means is capable of displaying the specific display in a manner capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example, the spherical display 129IW002b can be changed by the active display movement effect). It is indicated by moving to the start position at the start of display and to the end position at the end of variable display. 22-4.), When the specific display is displayed in a mode in which the variable display period can be suggested, it is possible to change the mode of the specific display in accordance with the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the spherical display 129IW002b, an active display change effect of changing the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b can be executed. See FIG. 22-5). Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic portion 129IW of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the display area of the image display device 5 includes an information display area (for example, an information display area 129IW001 shown in FIG. 22C) capable of displaying information relating to variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the information display area, as the information on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed (for example, an active display 129IW002 shown in FIG. 22-3 or FIG. 22-4) 129IW002a and sphere display 129IW002b), a hold display corresponding to the variable display of which execution is being held (for example, a hold display 129IW003 shown in FIG. 22-3), a variable of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A small symbol (for example, a small symbol display 129IW004 shown in FIG. 22-4) that performs variable display in synchronization with the display is displayed. In the information display area, an active display effect using the active display can be executed.

(Active display effect)
The active display effect includes an active display change effect for changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the active display, and an active display movement effect for moving and displaying the active display.

  Among the active display effects, in the active display change effect, the display mode of the active display is changed to a display mode (for example, a blue, green, or red sphere) different from the normal mode (for example, a white sphere), thereby obtaining a big hit. And an expected degree at which an advantageous effect (for example, a super-reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed. In addition, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit and the degree of expectation that an advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect or pseudo continuous effect) is executed.

  In the active display movement effect, the active display is displayed in such a manner that the variable display period can be suggested. Specifically, in the active display movement effect, the active display (for example, the spherical display 129IW002b) starts moving at the start of the variable display and ends moving at the end of the variable display. The active display is located at a position indicating the start of the variable display at the start of the variable display (hereinafter also referred to as a start position), and at a position indicating the end of the variable display at the end of the variable display (hereinafter also referred to as an end position). (For example, moving at a constant speed). With such an effect, the elapsed period and the remaining period of the variable display period are suggested by the positional relationship between the current position of the active display, the start position, and the end position.

  In the present embodiment, during one variable display, an active display change effect and an active display moving effect for the one variable display can be executed. When the active display change effect and the active display moving effect are executed, for example, the movement of the active display is started at the same time as the start of the variable display, and the display mode of the active display (for example, the display color) during the movement of the active display. Changes, and the movement of the active display ends with the end of the variable display.

(Active display effect determination processing)
FIG. 22A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the active display effect determination process. The active display effect determination processing is executed in the variable display start setting processing (step S171). In the active display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the active display change effect (step 129IWS001).

  In step 129IWS001, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery according to the variation pattern using the active display change effect execution determination table, and determines whether to execute the active display change effect.

  FIG. 22A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the active display change effect execution determination table. In the active display change effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 22A, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined as “executed” differs according to the content of the variation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” becomes higher in the order of “super reach”> “normal reach”> “non-reach”. Further, the determination value is assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” is higher when the variable display result is “big hit” than when it is “losing”. With such a configuration, when the active display change effect is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation and the advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect) to be executed are higher than when it is not executed. Will be.

  When it is determined that the active display change effect is to be executed (Y in step 129IWS002), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the active display movement effect (step 129IWS003). In the example illustrated in FIG. 22A, the active display movement effect can be executed only when the active display change effect is executed. However, the active display movement effect is performed regardless of the execution of the active display change effect. It may be executable. In the case of a specific effect mode among a plurality of types of effect modes, or in the case of a specific game state (for example, a probable change state) among a plurality of types of game states, an active display movement effect is always executed. You may do so.

  In step 129IWS003, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery according to the variation pattern using the active display movement effect execution determination table, and determines whether or not to execute the active display movement effect.

  FIG. 22B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an active display movement effect execution determination table. In the active display movement effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 22B, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined as “executed” differs depending on the content of the variation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” becomes higher in the order of “super reach”> “normal reach”> “non-reach”. Further, the determination value is assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” is higher when the variable display result is “big hit” than when it is “losing”. With such a configuration, when the active display movement effect is executed, it is suggested that the jackpot expectation and an advantageous effect (eg, a super reach effect) to be executed are higher than when the active display movement effect is not executed. Will be.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display after the change by the active display change effect (step 129IWS004).

  In step 129IWS004, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery according to the variation pattern using the active display mode determination table, and determines the display mode of the active display after the change.

  FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the active display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 22C, in this embodiment, in addition to the normal mode (white sphere), the first display mode (blue sphere), the second display mode (green sphere), and the second display mode (green sphere) Active display can be displayed in three display modes (red sphere).

  The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 22-2 (C) includes an order of “third display mode”> “second display mode”> “first display mode” in the order of big hit expectation and advantageous effects (for example, supermarket). The determination value is assigned such that the degree of expectation that a reach effect or the like is executed increases. With such a configuration, when the active display changes, attention can be paid to which display mode changes.

  In addition, the display mode of the active display after the change may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the active display movement effect is performed, without being limited to the example of the present embodiment. For example, when the active display movement effect is executed, the rate of determining the display mode with a higher degree of expectation may be higher than when the effect is not executed. Further, a display mode (for example, a fourth display mode with the highest expectation) that is determined only when the active display movement effect is executed may be provided.

  In addition, as a prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to a display mode different from the normal mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to each of the first to third display modes of the active display) is executed. Is also good. In addition, the active display may be the display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display (for example, the display mode may be the same as the display mode of the hold display, or some elements (for example, the shape and the size) are different. Other elements (for example, colors and patterns) may be displayed in the same display mode. In this case, the presence or absence of execution of the active display change effect or the active display movement effect may be determined at different rates according to the display mode when the display is displayed as the hold display. Further, the display mode after the change when executing the active display change effect and the change timing may be determined according to the display mode when the display is displayed as the hold display.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines the change timing of the active display by the active display change effect (step 129IWS005).

  In step 129IWS005, the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery according to the variation pattern using the active display change timing determination table, and determines the change timing of the active display.

  FIG. 22D is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the active display change timing determination table. As shown in FIG. 22-2 (D), in the present embodiment, the display mode of the active display at the first timing (at the start of fluctuation), the second timing (at the time of reaching reach), and the third timing (at the time of reaching the super reach) Is variable.

  The active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 22-2 (D) includes a big hit expectation and an advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect) in the order of “third timing”> “second timing”> “first timing”. , Etc.) are assigned such that the degree of expectation that the execution is performed is increased. With such a configuration, even when the display mode after the change is the same, the degree of expectation differs depending on the timing of the change, so that attention can be paid to the timing at which the active display changes.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the active display is changed once by the active display change effect, but may be changed a plurality of times. For example, when the display mode of the active display after the change by the active display change effect is determined as the third display mode, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the first display mode at the first timing, and changes from the first display mode at the second timing. The display mode may be changed to the second display mode, and may be changed from the second display mode to the third display mode at the third timing. That is, the change may be made at all timings. Further, for example, the display mode may be changed from the normal mode to the first display mode at the first timing, may be changed from the first display mode to the third display mode at the third timing, or may be changed from the normal mode to the third display mode at the first timing. The first display mode may be changed to the first display mode and the third display mode may be changed at the second timing. That is, the change may be performed by combining a plurality of timings. In addition, the ratio of the content of the active display change effect that occurs (that is, which of the first to third display modes changes) may be different for each change timing.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display period is suggested by the active display movement effect. However, the presence or absence of the change of the active display and the display mode after the change are determined based on the variation pattern. A variable display period will also be suggested. Specifically, when the active display is in the third display mode, the ratio of normal reach or super reach is higher than in the normal display mode, which suggests that the variable display period is longer. When the active display is in the normal mode, the ratio of non-reach is high, which indicates that the variable display period is short.

(Active display change effect)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the active display effect will be described. FIG. 22C is an explanatory diagram of an example of the effect of the active display change effect. In FIG. 22C, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  As shown in FIG. 22-3 (1), an information display area 129IW001 is provided below the display area of the image display device 5, and the information display area 129IW001 has an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. 129IW002 and a suspended display 129IW003 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In the example of FIG. 22-3 (1), the active display 129IW002 is displayed in such a manner that the sphere display corresponding to the variable display being executed is placed on the pedestal display.

  As shown in FIGS. 22-3 (1) and (2), when the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle left and right ends, the spherical display in the active display 129IW002 is deleted. Then, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (3), one hold storage is digested, the hold display is shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 22C, the active display change effect is executed at the timing when the reach is established. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22-3 (4), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, the display mode of the spherical display in the active display 129IW002 is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to the third mode. The display mode changes to one display mode (the color is blue in this example, but is represented by a hatched pattern in FIG. 22C).

(Active display movement effect)
FIG. 22D is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of the active display movement effect. In FIG. 22D, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  When the active display movement effect is executed, the active display movement effect is started together with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. When the active display movement effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (1), in the information display area 129IW001 of the image display device 5, the sphere display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed imitates a belt conveyor. The active display is displayed by the mode on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a. Also, in the information display area 129IW001, a small symbol display 129IW004 for performing variable display of small symbols in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. The small symbol display 129IW004 is provided at a position where it does not interfere with the super-reach production or the like even when the super-reach production or the like is performed. Is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4, when the active display movement effect is executed, the hold display is not displayed. With such a configuration, attention can be paid to the active display movement effect and the variable display being executed. The active display movement effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 22-4, and the hold display may be reduced and displayed, or a number or the like indicating the number of hold storage may be displayed. You may. Also, in the case of the state shown in FIG. 22C in which the active display movement effect is not executed, that is, regardless of whether the active display movement effect is executed or not, a number or the like indicating the number of retained storages may be displayed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 22-4 (1), (2), (3), and (4), with the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, according to the progress of the variable display period), the spherical display is performed. An effect in which the 129IW002b moves from the right end to the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (4), the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the left end of the belt conveyor display 129IW002a at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and as shown in FIG. 22-4 (5), When the variable display of a new decorative symbol is started, the spherical display 129IW002b falls off the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a and disappears, and the new spherical display 129IW002b is displayed on the right end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

  As described above, in the active display movement effect, the sphere display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed starts moving at the start of variable display and ends at the end of variable display. The sphere display 129IW002b is located at the start position (for example, the right end position on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a shown in FIG. 22-4 (1)) at the start of the variable display, and ends at the end of the variable display (for example, FIG. 22). -4 (4) (the left end position on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a). With such an effect, the elapsed period and the remaining period of the variable display period are suggested by the positional relationship between the current position and the start position and the end position of the spherical display 129IW002b. In addition, since the active display movement effect is executed in the information display area that displays information related to the variable display such as the active display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable display period is being executed. it can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22-4 (4), an effect in which the sphere display is moved by rotating the belt of the belt conveyor display in the traveling direction is performed. In the present embodiment, the variable display period is set for each variation pattern. However, the variable display period is set by changing the rotation speed of the belt according to the variation pattern (that is, changing the moving speed of the spherical display). Can respond to the differences. Note that, during a specific period (for example, after a big hit or a small hit, a period until the variable display count reaches a predetermined count (may be one or thirty), a certain variable display is performed. A configuration in which a fluctuation pattern set in a period is used, and an active display movement effect may be executed in the specific period. By doing so, the control load due to the active display movement effect can be reduced.

  Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 22-4, when the sphere display 129IW002b moves, the trajectory area in which the sphere display 129IW002b has moved is displayed in a different mode from before the movement (for example, different from before passing through the trajectory area). The display may be performed in a color, or a display color corresponding to the display mode of the spherical display 120IW002b). With such a configuration, the elapsed period can be easily recognized. Further, the trajectory region in which the spherical display 129IW002b has moved can be displayed in a plurality of modes, and the big hit expectation and the expectation at which an advantageous effect is executed are different depending on which mode is used. Good. That is, depending on the mode of the trajectory region, the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation that an advantageous effect is executed may be suggested.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22-4, the active display movement effect is started at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but at a predetermined timing after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, at the start of the super reach). ), The active display movement effect may be started. That is, the information display area is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 22-3 until a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of starting super reach) after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the predetermined timing (for example, super reach) After the start), the information display area may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the active display movement effect can be executed when the active display change effect is executed, but the active display change effect is not executed as in the example shown in FIG. 22-4. Also in this case, an active display movement effect may be configured to be executed.

(Active display movement effect and active display change effect)
FIG. 22D is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of the active display movement effect and the active display change effect. In FIG. 22-5, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  When the active display movement effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22-5 (1), in the information display area 129IW001 of the image display device 5, the sphere display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed imitates a belt conveyor. The active display is displayed by the mode on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 22-5 (1), (2), (3), and (4), with the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, in accordance with the progress of the variable display period), the spherical display is performed. An effect in which the 129IW002b moves from the right end to the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a is performed. At this time, at the execution timing of the active display change effect, as shown in FIGS. 22-5 (2), (3), and (4), the robot arm 129IW005 appears, and the sphere display 129IW002b grasped by the robot arm 129IW005. Is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to the third display mode (red in this example, but represented in black in FIG. 22-5). When the active display change effect is executed during the execution of the active display movement effect, the effect of temporarily stopping the movement of the active display (the sphere display 129IW002b in FIG. 22-5) and changing the display mode was performed. Later, the movement may be resumed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect control from becoming too complicated.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-5 (4), the sphere display 129IW002b reaches the left end of the belt conveyor display 129IW002a at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol ends, and as shown in FIG. 22-5 (5). When the variable display of a new decorative symbol is started, the spherical display 129IW002b falls off the left end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a and disappears, and the new spherical display 129IW002b is displayed on the right end on the belt conveyor display 129IW002a.

  As described above, when the active display change effect and the active display move effect are executed, the display mode (that is, the degree of expectation) changes while the sphere display 129IW002b corresponding to the variable display being executed is moving. It is configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced due to the fact that the development of the effect can be read ahead, and to continuously attract the player's attention to the moving sphere display 129IW002b. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the degree of expectation differs depending on the timing at which the display mode of the spherical display 129IW002b changes (that is, the position at which the display changes) (see FIG. 22-2 (D)), the moving spherical display 129IW002b can be used. The player's attention.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the active display (the spherical display 129IW002b in FIG. 22-5) is configured to change only once, but may be changed a plurality of times. With such a configuration, it is possible to continuously attract the player's attention to the moving sphere display 129IW002b.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention starts the display in response to the start of the variable display, and ends the display in response to the end of the variable display (for example, active display or active display movement). Specific display execution means capable of executing a sphere display 129IW002b in the effect) is provided, and the specific display execution means can display the specific display in a form capable of suggesting a variable display period (for example, a sphere in the active display movement effect). The display 129IW002 is indicated by moving to the start position at the start of the variable display and to the end position at the end of the variable display, as shown in Fig. 22-4, and also indicated by the display mode of the active display. ), When the specific display is displayed in a manner that can suggest the variable display period, the degree of expectation controlled to an advantageous state The specific display mode can be changed accordingly (for example, an active display change effect that changes the display mode of the sphere display 129IW002b can be executed during the execution of the active display movement effect of moving the sphere display 129IW002b). (See FIG. 22-5). According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the specific display execution means may display the specific display in a predetermined display area (for example, information display area 129IW001; see FIG. 22-4) in which information on the variable display is displayed. According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize the variable display period.

  In addition, when the specific display is displayed, information on the variable display in the predetermined display area may be difficult to visually recognize (see FIGS. 22-3 and 22-4). According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the variable display being executed.

  Further, the specific display execution means moves and displays the specific display during the variable display, suggests the variable display period by the display position of the specific display, and changes the mode of the specific display when the specific display is moved. (See FIG. 22-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to continuously attract the player's attention to the moving specific display.

  Further, even if the specific display mode after the change is the same, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which display position of the specific display changes the mode (FIG. 22). -2 (D)). According to such a configuration, a position at which the specific display changes can be noticed.

  Further, when the specific display moves, the trajectory area where the specific display has moved may be displayed in a different mode from before the movement. According to such a configuration, the elapsed period can be easily recognized.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 130IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 130IW of the present embodiment will be described. Here, the display area of the image display device 5 includes an effect display area for displaying an effect related to a game, and an information display area. In the information display area, an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed (for example, the active display 130IW001 shown in FIG. 23-3) and a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended (for example, FIG. 3, a small symbol (for example, a small symbol display 129IW004 shown in FIG. 23-3) that performs variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a display related thereto. (For example, storage box display 130IW003 or the like in which the robot arm shown in FIG. 23-4 is stored) is displayed. The information display area is provided so as to overlap the effect display area. In this example, the information display area which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided so as to overlap the effect display area which is the entire display area of the image display device 5. For example, in the example of FIG. 23C, in the entire display area (that is, the effect display area) of the image display device 5, an area in which the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002, and the storage box display 130IW003 are displayed is the information display area. .

(Predetermined production)
In the present embodiment, a predetermined effect can be executed by displaying a decoration display in association with the information display area. The predetermined effect includes a first type for changing the background image, a second type for changing the display mode of the hold display, and a third type for changing the background image and changing the display mode of the hold display. I have. The mode of the decorative display displayed in association with the information display area is different depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed. In the present embodiment, “display in association with the information display area” means that an image is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the target information display area (that is, displayed so as to physically touch). In addition, an image related to the image displayed in the target information display area is displayed (for example, an image having the content corresponding to the content of the image displayed in the information display area or the information display area). (Displaying an image or the like acting on a displayed image), which means displaying the image in connection with a target information display area.

(Predetermined production decision processing)
FIG. 23A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the predetermined effect determination process. The predetermined effect determination process is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). The predetermined effect determination process is executed only when a start winning is generated and an effect control command for the start winning is received. In the predetermined effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect and the type of execution of the predetermined effect (step 130IWS001).

  In step 130WSS001, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery using the predetermined effect execution determination table in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the received start control effect control command, and determines whether or not to execute the predetermined effect. Determine the type of case. If the predetermined effect can be executed at any timing from the start winning prize to the end of the target variable display, the execution timing of the execution is also determined. In this case, the big hit expectation may be changed according to the execution timing.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the predetermined effect execution determination table. In the predetermined effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 23A, the determination values are assigned so that the ratio determined as “executed” differs depending on the content of the variation pattern. Specifically, the determination values are assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” becomes higher in the order of “super reach”> “normal reach”> “non-reach”. Further, the determination value is assigned so that the percentage determined as “executed” is higher when the variable display result is “big hit” than when it is “losing”. With such a configuration, the execution of the predetermined effect indicates that the degree of expectation that a jackpot expectation or an advantageous effect (for example, a super reach effect) is executed is higher than when the predetermined effect is not executed. become.

  The predetermined effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 23-2 (A) has a big hit expectation and an advantageous effect (for example, super reach effect, etc.) in the order of “third type”> “second type”> “first type”. The determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation that () is performed becomes higher. With such a configuration, when the predetermined effect is executed, attention can be paid to which type is executed. Note that the third type of predetermined effect that changes the display mode of the hold display while changing the background image is used when the background image is changed by the first type of predetermined effect or when the hold display is changed by the second type of predetermined effect. When the display mode is changed, the presentation mode such as the appearance and the sound effect may be changed. In addition, the first type of predetermined effect (background change) may be executable regardless of the degree of expectation. In other words, it may be a production that does not indicate the expectation

  If it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be executed (Y in step 130IWS002), the effect control CPU 120 determines the mode of the decorative display effect in which the decorative display is displayed in association with the information display area prior to the predetermined effect (step 130IWS003). ).

  In step 130IWS003, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery in accordance with the type of the predetermined effect by using the decoration display determination table, and determines the mode of the decoration display effect.

  FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the decoration display determination table. The decoration display determination table shown in FIG. 23-2 (B) is configured so that the mode of the decoration display displayed in association with the information display area differs depending on the type of the predetermined effect to be executed. According to the decoration display determination table shown in FIG. 23B, when the decoration display effect of the first mode is executed, the first type of predetermined effect is executed, and the decoration display effect of the second mode is executed. And a second type of predetermined effect is executed. Exceptionally, when the decoration display effect of the third mode is executed, a predetermined effect of any of the first type, the second type, and the third type is executed.

  In the decoration display effect of the first aspect, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-5, two robot arms 130IW005 are displayed as decoration displays so as to be attached to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002. In the decoration display effect of the second aspect, for example, as shown in FIG. 23-4, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed as a decoration display so as to appear from the storage box display 130IW003.

  Next, a specific example of the information display area will be described. FIG. 23C is an explanatory diagram of an example of the information display area.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 23-3 (1) and (2), the information display area which is a part of the display area of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the effect display area which is the entire display area of the image display device 5. Is provided. Specifically, in the entire display area (that is, the effect display area) of the image display device 5, the active display 130IW001 corresponding to the variable display being executed, the hold display 130IW002 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended, the hold display The area where the storage box display 130IW003 in which the robot arm 130IW005 used for the effect of changing the display mode of the active display is displayed is the information display area. The reservation display 130IW002 includes a belt conveyor display imitating a belt conveyor and a sphere display corresponding to each reservation storage, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is overlapped with the belt conveyor display of the reservation display 130IW002. The small symbol display 130IW004 for performing the variable display of the small symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the small symbol is displayed. In the example of FIG. 23C, the area where the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002, and the storage box display 130IW003 are displayed is the information display area as it is. May be displayed in the area defined as the information display area.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 23-3 (1) and (2), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 operates to move the sphere display corresponding to each hold memory. Then, a shift effect is performed in which the sphere display falling from the belt conveyor display is placed on the pedestal portion of the active display 130IW001. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is also started.

(Predetermined production (change pending))
FIG. 23D is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect (change on hold). In FIG. 23D, the state of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  As shown in FIG. 23-4 (1), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed and the active display 130IW001 and the hold display 130IW002 are displayed in the information display area of the image display device 5, the second mode is used. Is performed, a display in which the robot arm 130IW005 appears from the storage box display 130IW003 is performed as a decoration display, and the appearing robot arm 130IW005 has a degree of overlap with the effect display area in the information display area. An effect of grasping the third spherical display from the left of the high hold display 130IW002 (corresponding to the third hold memory) is performed (FIG. 23-4 (2)). That is, the robot arm 130IW005, which is a decorative display, is displayed over (attached to) the hold display 130IW002. Then, the predetermined effect (the sphere display gripped by the robot arm 130IW005) changes from the normal mode (white in this example) to the special mode (red in this example, but expressed in black in FIG. 23-4). 23 (3) is executed. Here, the operation mode of the robot arm (for example, what number of the holding unit is to be grasped) by the decoration display effect that is executed in advance is determined by the order of the display of the spherical display that is changed by the predetermined effect (hold change). It is determined in advance. The robot arm 130IW005 may enlarge and display a portion that is in contact with the hold display 130IW002 (or the sphere display) or display it with an effect display to make it easier to attract attention. In the example of the predetermined effect (change of hold) shown in FIG. 23-4, the display mode of the spherical display of the hold display 130IW002 changes when the robot arm 130IW005 grasps the belt, but the belt conveyor display operates (for example, the belt conveyor is operated). By rotating the sphere display in the forward or backward direction to vibrate the sphere display, the display mode of the sphere display may be changed. That is, the predetermined effect (hold change) may be executed in a mode using the belt conveyor display serving as the base of the sphere display. In addition, both the effect of using the belt conveyor display serving as the base of the spherical display and the effect of displaying the decoration display (the robot arm 130IW005) on the hold display 130IW002 in a superimposed manner (attached) are executed. The display mode of the display may be changed.

  Note that the degree of overlap of the information display area with the effect display area means the degree at which each area (active display 130IW001, hold display 130IW002, and storage box display 130IW003) constituting the information display area overlaps the effect display area. In the example, as the size of the area forming the information display area increases, the degree of overlap with the effect display area increases. In the information display area, the decoration display is displayed in association with the area having a high degree of overlap with the effect display area (in this example, the hold display 130IW002) (in this example, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to grasp the spherical display of the hold display 130IW002). By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that the decorative display has been displayed while visually recognizing the information display area.

  In the present embodiment, the decoration display effect of the second mode (specifically, the robot arm 130IW005 grasps the sphere display corresponding to the hold storage) is configured to change the display mode of the hold display. Depending on the operation or mode of the robot arm (for example, how to move until it attaches to the hold display, the color, size, shape, etc. of the robot arm), the ratio of whether or not the hold display changes and the degree of expectation differs. The ratio of the change of the hold display to any one of the display modes may be different.

(Predetermined performance (background change))
FIG. 23E is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an effect mode of a predetermined effect (background change). In FIG. 23-5, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  As shown in FIG. 23-5 (1), when the decoration display effect of the first mode is executed prior to the predetermined effect (background change), the robot arm 130IW005 displays the effect display in the information display area as a decoration display. It is displayed so as to be attached to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 having a high degree of overlap with the area. That is, the robot arm 130IW005, which is a decorative display, is displayed over (attached to) the hold display 130IW002. Then, as shown in FIG. 23-5 (2), the robot arm 130IW005 grasps the background image, and as shown in FIG. 23-5 (3), the predetermined effect (the background image grasped by the robot arm 130IW005 changes). Background change) is performed. Note that the display mode of the active display 130IW001, the hold display 130IW002 (spherical display or belt conveyor display), the storage box display 130IW003 in the information display area, and the mode of the robot arm 130IW005 may be changed according to the change of the background image. May be changed.

  Regardless of whether the predetermined effect (hold change) shown in FIG. 23-4 or the predetermined effect (background change) shown in FIG. 23-5 is executed, a common start-up effect (for example, , An effect in which the display of the belt conveyor vibrates) may be executed. With such a configuration, when the start-time effect is executed, in what form the decorative display is displayed, that is, which of the predetermined effect (hold change) and the predetermined effect (background change) is executed Can be noticed.

  The effect performed in the information display area may be related to the effect performed in the effect display area. For example, when a battle effect is being executed in the effect display area, the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 and the sphere display placed thereon may vibrate in the information display area. In addition, for example, a decorative display (for example, the robot arm 130IW005) displayed in the information display area may act on the preview image displayed in the effect display area to change the mode of the preview image.

  Also, when a predetermined effect (background change) or a predetermined effect (hold change) is being executed, a decorative display (for example, the robot arm 130IW005) may be displayed in an operation manner. With such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  In addition, when a shift effect of the hold display is being executed together with the predetermined operation display (for example, the operation of the belt conveyor) in the information display area, the decoration display (for example, the robot arm) may be displayed as the operation display. . With such a configuration, the individual action displays are performed in parallel, so that the player can easily recognize that the shift effect of the hold display has been performed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the active display 130IW001, the hold display, and the information display area (for example, in the example of FIG. 23-3, the entire display area of the image display device 5 (that is, the effect display area)). An information display area where the display 130IW002 and the storage box display 130IW003 are displayed), a display means capable of displaying information related to the game (for example, the active display 130IW001 and the hold display 130IW002), and an information display area. By displaying a decoration display (for example, the robot arm 130IW005; see FIG. 23-4) in association with a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect (background change) or a predetermined effect (hold change)). And a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect. Flip and decorative display mode of which is displayed in association with the information display region are different (e.g., FIG. 23-2 (B), see Fig. 23-4, Fig. 23-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the presentation and enhance the interest.

  The predetermined effect execution means displays the decoration display in association with a part of the information display area (for example, the robot arm is displayed so as to grasp the spherical display of the suspension display 130IW002 in the information display area. The robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to adhere to the belt conveyor display of the hold display 130IW002 (see FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5), thereby executing a predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the effect without excessively moving the line of sight.

  The display area of the display means includes an effect display area for displaying an effect related to the game, and an information display area. At least a part of the effect display area and the information display area overlap with each other. (For example, the robot arm is displayed so as to grasp the sphere display of the hold display 130IW002 having a high degree of overlap with the effect display area in the information display area. Further, the robot arm 130IW005 is displayed so as to be attached to the hold display 130IW002 having a high degree of overlap with the effect display area in the information display area (see FIGS. 23-4 and 23-5). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the decorative display has been displayed even when viewing the effect in the effect display area.

  The predetermined effect execution means can execute a predetermined effect of changing the background image in the effect display area (see FIG. 23-5). According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Further, when the background image of the effect display area is changed by the predetermined effect, a change effect that changes at least a part of the information related to the game displayed in the information display area (for example, the background image That the display mode such as the active display 130IW001 and the hold display 130IW002 (sphere display or belt conveyor display) in the information display area can be changed, or the mode of the robot arm 130IW005 can be changed. The effect execution means may be provided. According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  Also, the predetermined effect execution means may cause the decorative display to be operatively displayed when the predetermined effect is being executed (for example, when the background image is changed, the robot arm 130IW005 is operated. 5). According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

  The information processing apparatus further includes a holding storage unit capable of storing information related to the variable display as the holding storage, and a holding display unit capable of displaying a holding display corresponding to the holding storage in the information display area. It is possible to shift the hold display together with the operation display of the above, and the predetermined effect execution means performs the operation display of the decoration display even when the shift display of the hold display is being executed together with the predetermined operation display in the information display area. It may be possible. According to such a configuration, since the individual operation displays are performed in parallel, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the hold shift has been performed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 51: Lock switch 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 Display control unit AK001 Clear switch 71AK001 Output amount changeover switch 72AKP01 Short initial control pattern 72AKP02 Long initial control pattern 74AKP01 Effect control pattern

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect,
further,
A specific display execution unit that can start a display according to the start of the variable display and execute a specific display to end the display according to the end of the variable display,
The specific display execution means,
The specific display can be displayed in a mode that can suggest the variable display period,
When the specific display is displayed in a mode that can suggest a variable display period, the mode of the specific display can be changed according to the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state. Machine.